Skip to main content

Full text of "Manual of harmony; a practical guide to its study, expressly prepared for the Conservatory of Music at Leipsic"

See other formats


'^^^^•i/ir^^i::!:^;!"-1:^;^;;;;!;!!;!^:^:;)!'))  !;*;):;;;/;;;->::-:!;;;,!;':»!!';;•: 


-• 


IRICHTER'Sa 


MANUAL"  HARMONY 


J.C.aPARKER.I 


-  • ...  -•-•  > 


BttQUHBHI 

^Hl 

HI 


II 


RICHTER'S 


MANUAL  OF  HAKMONY: 


PRACTICAL  GUIDE  TO  ITS  STUDY: 


EXPBESSLT  PREPARED  FOR  THE 


CONSERVATORY  OF  MUSIC  AT  LEIPSIC 


BT 


ERNST  FRIEDRICH  RICHTER. 


TRANSLATED  FROM  THE  EIGHTH  GERMAN  EDITION 


R. 

UNIVERSITY,  OF  TORONTO 


BOSTON:  ,  \\_\\\  ( 

PUBLISHED  BY  OLIVER  DITSON  &  COMPANY., 

NEW  YORK :  0.  H.  DITSON  &  CO.-CHIOAGO :  LTON  &  HEALY.         \ 

»A  Co..  In  the  Office  of  the  Lib 

of  Congress,  at  Washington. 


S&iared,  according  to  Act  of  Congress,  in  the  year  1873,  by  O.  DITSON  <fe  Co.,  In  the  Office  of  the  LflxaxilO 


".•'//, 


PREFACE  TO  THE  FIRST  EDITION. 

THE  chief  motive  for  the  publication  of  this  system  of  Harmony  is  given 
on  the  title-page.  It  was  to  furnish  pupils  through  their  course  of  study  in 
musical  theory  with  some  aid  in  illustrating  and  reviewing  the  principles 
brought  before  them.  The  essential  qualities  of  such  a  book  the  author 
believed  to  be  these :  that  it  contain  the  substance  and  fundamental  features 
of  musical  theory  in  as  condensed  and  complete  form  as  possible  ;  that  it 
present  these  outlines  together  with  practical  directions  and  hints,  to  prepare 
the  way  for  later  attempts  in  composition. 

The  book  comprises,  scientifically  speaking,  no  theoretical  treatise  upon 
Harmonics,  but  although,  like  every  system  of  Harmony  it  rests  upon  a  firm 
foundation,  it  is  devoted  only  to  practical  ends,  which  with  the  scanty  means 
now  accessible  it  might  be  difficult  to  reach  upon  abstractly  scientific  prin- 
ciples. 

There  has  indeed  been  hitherto  an  eager  inquiry  for  mathematical  preci- 
sion in  musical  rules,  especially  among  the  young,  who,  naturally  opposed 
to  an  authoritative  creed,  would  fain  have  everything  so  clear  as  to  be 
beyond  a  doubt ;  while  on  the  other  hand  they  are  ever  fearful  of  learning 
to  know  and  comprehend  the  blooming  life  of  art  by  the  anatomical  knife  j 
nor  is  it  to  be  denied,  that  in  this  regard  there  is  a  gap  in  musical  literature, 
which  no  one  has  yet  been  able  completely  to  fill.  All  attempts  of  this 
kind  have  thus  far  failed  to  produce  a  really  tenable  scientifically  musical 
system,  in  accordance  with  which  all  phenomena  within  the  domain  of  music 
shall  be  constantly  regarded  as  necessary  deductions  from  a  single  fundamen- 
tal principle ;  and  all  that  the  philosophers,  mathematicians  and  physicists 
have  achieved  in  the  matter  is  indeed  worthy  of  notice,  but  has  been  011  the 
one  hand  too  disjointed  to  form  a  complete  whole,  and  on  the  other  too 
abstract,  less  serviceable  for  music  than  for  other  purposes,  and  whatever 


IT  PREFACE. 

comprehension  of  musical  matters  it  may  have  displayed,  having  but  littlo 
reference  to  the  essentially  musical,  which  for  the  musician  is  the  chief  point 
in  question.  But  all  that  has  been  laid  down  in  musical  manuals  as  a  scien- 
tific basis  has  thus  far  failed  to  hold  good,  partly  because  as  the  result  of 
individual  and  learned  research  it  was  also  unable  to  form  a  complete  system 
with  infallible  deductions,  and  partly  because  as  a  fanciful  structure  it  was 
wholly  wanting  in  scientific  support. 

(It  may  be  permitted  here  to  call  attention  to  a  work  which  may  be  able 
to  fill  an  evident  gap ;  T/ie  Nature  of  Harmonic  and  Metrical  Laws,  by  M. 
Hauptmann.) 

Yet  rightly  considered,  this  want  is  felt  only  by  the  riper  and  cultivated 
musician,  who  loves  to  busy  himself  with  theory;  but  for  the  less  advanced 
scholar  is  not  so  detrimental  as  to  affect  his  immediate  progress ;  and  the 
skepticism  above  alluded  to  is  to  a  certain  extent  no  more  to  be  heeded,  than 
'that  childish  disposition,  which  from  overweening  curiosity  would  fain  come 
at  the  primal  cause  of  everything  by  questions  that  can  seldom  be  answered 
intelligibly  enough  to  conform  to  the  precise  stage  of  his  progress.  In  his 
early  course  the  musician  has  to  direct  all  his  energies  to  his  technical  for- 
mation, as  it  will  cost  him  time  and  trouble  enough  to  reach  the  point  whence 
he  may  with  greater  ease  meet  his  peculiar  position  as  artist.  It  concerns 
not  here  to  ask  Why,  but  more  nearly  How  ;  to  learn  from  experience  and 
from  the  best  models  the  necessity  of  certain  principles,  not  to  calculate  it ; 
afterwards,  when  culture,  knowledge,  capacity  and  calling  demand,  it  will  be 
time  to  search  out  the  why,  and  all  the  knowledge  acquired  by  experience 
will  be  an  assistance  not  to  be  despised  in  discovering  the  musical  laws  of 
nature. 

With  this  practical  object  in  view,  the  author  has  endeavoured  to  give  in 
a  simple  and  clear  manner  an  explanation  of  Harmony,  and  of  the  results 
of  observation  and  experience ;  and  as  he  intended  the  book  for  study,  to  let 
the  truths  contained  in  it  work  foi  themselves,  without  wishing  to  procure 
for  them  %y  a  very  learned  garb  or  winning  form,  a  large  circle  of  readers. 


PREFACE.  v 

Ii  coniprises  the  whole  doctrine  of  Harmony  with  hints  of  a  rational  method 
of  making  exercises  for  its  more  thorough  knowledge,  and  for  the  skillful 
use  of  all  the  fundamental  principles.  These  exercises  extend  as  far  as  the 
beginning  of  contrapuntal  studies;  the  science  of  counterpoint  itself  will 
follow  in  a  later  volume. 

A  word  in  conclusion  to  the  young  student,  serious  indeed,  but  well-meant. 

A  far  distant  goal  is  to  be  reached ;  it  is  really  this,  that  art  has  to 
achieve.  For  this  is  needed  an  intense,  untiring  activity  to  grasp  the  funda- 
mental principles  of  music,  and  to  give  vital  shape  to  what  is  acquired  and 
recognized.  They  will  be  bitterly  deceived,  who,  filled  with  the  works  of 
our  great  masters,  endowed  with  poetic  minds,  suppose  they  can  pluck  the 
blossoms,  without  learning  thoroughly  to  know  and  test  technical  means ; 
who  adhere  to  the  idea  that  the  sacred  charm  of  beauty  which  overhangs  a 
work  of  art  must  suffer  by  the  analysis  of  material,  or  that  the  natural  forms 
of  the  latter  could  never  be  developed  into  that  essential  beauty.  No  talent 
has  ever  reached  that  height  at  which  alone  artistic  efforts  are  successful, 
without  thorough  knowledge  (which  for  it  indeed  was  easier  to  attain  than 
for  the  less  gifted.)  Practice  without  theoretical  intelligence  is  not  the 
mark  of  the  artist,  it  is  merely  the  working  of  instinct,  which  will  make  the 
want  of  a  thorough  culture  continually  perceptible.  An  ingenious  thought 
cannot  dispense  with  form,  and  this  it  is  which  must  be  recognized  and 
learned.  If  this  indeed  comes  often  of  itself  with  the  invention,  it  is  impor- 
tant in  music  more  than  elsewhere,  to  analyze  the  thought  logically  as  it 
were,  to  remodel  it  into  new  shapes,  and  to  change  it  in  the  most  varied 
manner.  The  knowledge  of  these  things  and  skill  in  their  use  the  man  of 
talent  must  acquire,  and  it  can  only  be  done  when  one  is  at  pains  to  recog. 
nise  musical  laws  and  what  others  have  already  discovered  long  before,  and 
seeks  to  imitate  and  further  develope  it.  Earnest,  persevering  effort,  and 
above  all  a  rational  method  for  unfolding  to  maturity  and  for  the  creation  of 
vital  works  of  art,  will  with  musical  capacity  surely  lead  to  the  goal. 


PREFACE  TO  THE  SEVENTH  EDITION. 

THE  methodical  arrangement  of  subjects  has  been  retained  in  the  former 
editions  of  the  Manual.  I  have  been  the  less  induced  to  make  any  altera- 
tion from  the  fact  that,  apart  from  my  own  experience,  the  book  has  been 
foul  d  useful  in  more  enlarged  circles,  as  is  proved  by  the  editions  so  quickly 
following  each  other.  Having  endeavoured,  however,  in  each  new  edition, 
to  introduce  improvements  and  additions  in  the  exercises  and  explanations, 
I  have  bestowed  much  care  in  revising  the  present  one  also.  It  contains, 
nevertheless,  no  essential  changes,  so  that  with  the  exception  of  the  first 
three,  all  the  previous  editions,  specially  the  sixth,  can  well  be  used  with  this 
—a  great  advantage  in  schools  where  the  book  is  introduced. 


PREFACE  TO  THE  EIGHTH  EDITION. 

THIS  edition  also  contains  no  important  alteration,  only  that  I  have 
Endeavoured  here  and  there  by  improvements  of  style  to  contribute  to  the 
better  understanding  of  single  passages.  For  the  friendly  recognition  of  my 
labours,  as  is  best  shown  by  the  rapid  succession  and  marked  increase  of 
editions,  affording  me  a  pledge  of  the  utility  of  my  unpretending  book,  I 
have  to  express  my  special  gratitude. 

ERNST  FRIEDRICH  RICHTER. 
LEIPZIG,  February,  1870. 


TABLE   OF  CONTENTS. 


PAftS. 

INTRODUCTION,— SYSTEM  OP  INTERVALS, 19 


SECTION    I 

THE  PRINCIPAL  HARMONIES  AND  CHORDS  DERIVED  FROM  THEM. 

CHAPTER  FIRST.— THE  TRIADS  OP  THE  MAJOR  SCALB,       .       .       .       .21 

CHAPTER  SECOND.— THE  TRIADS  OP  THE  MINOR  SCALE,       ...  40 

CHAPTER  THIRD.— INVERSIONS  OP  TRIADS, 47 

CHAPTER  FOURTH.— SEVENTH-HARMONIES.    CHORDS  o»  FOUR  TONES,  .  M 

CHAPTER  FIFTH.— INVERSIONS  OP  THE  SEVENTH-CHORD,      ....  59 

CHAPTER  SIXTH.— COLLATERAL  SEVENTH-HARMONIES,      ....  64 

CHAPTER  SEVENTH.— INVERSION  OP  THE  COLLATERAL  SEVENTH-CHORDS,  .  78 
CHAPTER  EIGHTH.— SEVENTH  CHORDS  IN  CONNECTION  WITH  CHORDS  OP 

OTHER  DEGREES, 81 

CHAPTER  NINTH.— CHORDS  OP  THE  NINTH,  ELEVENTH  AND  THIRTEENTH,  .  88 
CHAPTER  TENTH.  —  CHROMATIC  ALTERATION  OP  THE  PRINCIPAL  HARMO- 
NIES.   ALTERED  CHORDS, 91 

CHAPTER  ELEVENTH.— ON  MODULATION,             102 


SECTION    II 

INCIDENTAL  CHORD-FORMATIONS.    TONES  FOREIGN  TO  THE  HARMONY. 

CHAPTER  TWELFTH.— SUSPENSIONS, .  .105 

CHAPTER  THIRTEENTH.— ORGAN  POINT.— SUSTAINED  PARTS,       .       .  123 

CHAPTER  FOURTEENTH.— PASSING  NOTES.— APPOGGIATUBAS,     .       .  .128 

CHAPTER  FIFTEENTH.— PASSING  CHORDS, 188 

CHAPTER  SIXTEENTH.— MEANS  OP  MODULATION                .       .       .  .141 


Viil  CONTENTS. 


SECTION    IIL 

PEAOTICAL  APPLICATION  OF  HAEMONIES.    EXERCISES  FOE  THEIB  USB 
IN  PUEE  PART-WRITING. 

FAGH 

CHAPTER  SEVENTEENTH. — SIMPLE   HARMONIC   ACCOMPANIMENT   TO  A 

GIVEN  PAST, 151 

CHAPTER  EIGHTEENTH.— EXTENSION  or  THE  HARMONIC  ACCOMPANI- 
MENT,      .       .       .       ,       .       ,       .       . 173 

CHAPTER  NINETEENTH.— FORMATION  OF  MELODY,  ....  176 
CHAPTER  TWENTIETH. — FORMATION  OP  THE  ACCOMPANYING  PARTS,  .  183 
CHAPTER  TWENTY-FIRST.— EXERCISES  IN  THREE-PART  MOVEMENT,  .  187 
CHAPTER  TWENTY-SECOND.— TWO-PART  MOVEMENT,  .  .  .  .193 
CHAPTER  TWENTY-THIRD.— HARMONIC  TREATMENT  OF  A  GIVEN  PART 

IN  MELODIC  FORM, 193 

CHAPTER   TWENTY-FOURTH.— FIVE-PART  MOVEMENT,    .        .       .       .202 
CHAPTER    TWENTY-FIFTH.  —  Six-,    SEVEN-,   AND   EIGHT-PART   MOVE- 
MENT,       ".,      Y       .       ,         206 

CHAPTER  TWENTY-SIXTH.— FORMS  o»  MUSICAL  EWDINGS,  .  .  .113 
INDEX  OF  SUBJECTS  .  216 


INDEX  OF  SUBJECTS. 


Accompaniment,  figured  page  183 ;  harmonic  ace.  to  a  given  part,  151, 173, 195. 

Afterstriking  of  harmonic  tones,  121. 

Alto,  23 ;  Alto  notes,  Alto  clef,  113. 

Antecedent,  177. 

Anticipation,  121. 

Appoggtaturas,  128,  129,  134. 

Arsis,  107,  138,  174. 

Boss,  23  ;  movement,  progression  of  the  same,  34,  36,  153,  205. 

Cadence,  55,  81 ;  whole,  half,  178, 214;  perfect,  imperfect,  62,  214 ;  in  modulation,  148, 

Cadence-formidce,  149,  150. 

Cantus  Jirmus,  196. 

C-clef,  113. 

Chorals  as  exercises,  175,  205. 

Chord,  21. 

Chord-formations,  incidental,  105. 

Chord  of  four  tones,  54 ;  see  Seventh-chord. 

Chord  of  tfo  eleventh,  88,  90. 

Chord  of  the  Fourth-and-Third,  59,  61,  62;  augmented,  96. 

Chord  of  the  Second,  59,  61,  63. 

Chord  of  the  Sixth,  47  ;  augmented,  94. 

Chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fifth,  59,  60,  62;  as  Suspension,  189;  augmented,  97;  in  modula- 
tion, 147. 

Chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth,  48;  in  forming  cadences,  53;  in  modulation,  143;  a» 
passing  chord,  139;  use  of  the  same,  153;  of  the  augmented  triad,  92, 198;  of  th« 
diminished  triad,  155,  188. 

Chord  of  the  Sixth-Fourth-and- Second,  see  chord  of  the  Second. 

Chord  of  the  Sixth~Fourth-and-77iird,  see  ch.  of  the  Fourth-and-Third. 

Chord  of  the  Tliirteenth,  88,  90. 

Chords,  altered,  43, 91, 101 ;  passing,  138 ;  view  of  the  same,  99.  See  also  Triads,  Seventh, 
chords. 

Chromatic  alteration,  91. 

Close,  32 ;  authentic,  plagal,  32,  213.  See  also  Cadence,  Whole  cadence,  Half  cadence, 
False  cadence. 

Close-formation,  40,  53,  55,  213. 

Closing  cadence,  55,  81. 

Closing  formula,  40,  41,  149. 

Collateral  seventh-cJiords,  64,  78,  86. 

Collateral  tones,  harmonic,  128. 

Collateral  triads,  in  major  33 ;  in  minor  48 

Compass  of  parts,  113. 
9 


10  MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 

Connection,  25,  73,  81 ;  local,  inward,  35. 

Consequent ,  177., 

Consonance,  17,  perfect,  imperfect,  17. 

Contrary  motion,  26,  135,  201. 

Cross  relation,  unharmonic,  166. 

Degrees,  diatonic,  73 

Dissonance,  17. 

Dominant-harmony,  see  Triad,  Seventh-chord, 
in  modulation,  144. 

Doubling  of  intervals,  25,  39,  48,  58,  70,  94,  109,  111,  132,  203,  206. 

Eleventh,  14. 

Exercises  for  practice  in  harmonizing  (principal  triads  in  major)  30,  (all  the  triads  in 
major)  37,  triads  in  minor)  45,  (inversions  of  the  triads)  49,  dominant  seventh 
chord)  58,  (inversions  of  the  same)  63,  (collateral  seventh  chords)  73,  (connection  of 
seventh  chords)  74,  (collateral  seventh  chords  in  minor)  77,  (inversions  of  the  same) 
80,  (false  cadence)  85,  (collateral  seventh  chords  in  connection  with  chords  of  other 
degrees  or  keys)  87,  (augmented  triad)  94,  (other  altered  chords)  98,  (study  of  mod- 
ulations) 103,  (suspensions)  112,  119,  (harmonic  accompaniment  to  a  given  melody) 
151,  152,  157,  163,  164,  165,  170,  171,  172,  173,  (formation  of  melody)  177,  (three- 
part  movement)  187,  188,  191,  (two-part  movement)  193,  (harmonic  treatment  of  a 
given  part  in  melodic  form)  195,  199),  (five-part  movement)  202,  205. 

Extreme  parts,  23. 

False  cadence,  81,  214. 

Fifteenth^  14. 

Fifth,  13,22;  perfect,  15,  16  ;  augmented,  15,  16,  75  ;  diminished,  15,  16,  38,  60;  fifth  in 
the  seventh-chord,  57,  ?0. 

Fifth-progressions  (parallel  fifths),  26,  28,  51,  79,  97;  open,  30,  79;  concealed,  30,  37,  99, 
158,  204;  in  passing  notes  and  appoggiaturas,  133  ;  in  contrary  motion,  201. 

Fourteenth,  14. 

Fourth,  13;  perfect,  augmented,  diminished,  15,  16;  preparation  of  the  perfect  fourth,  155 
the  same  as  chord,  189, 196. 

Fourth-progressions  (parallel  fourths)  in  passing,  134, 136. 

Fundamental  harmonies,  21 ;  chromatic  alterations  of  the  same,  91. 

Fundamental  tone,  21 ;  in  seventh  chord  57. 

Half  cadence,  178,  213. 

Harmony,  System  of,  21. 

Interchanging,  47 ;  see  inversion. 

Interval,  13 ;  major,  perfect,  14  ;  minor,  augmented,  diminished,  15. 

Intervals,  division  of,  17 ;  view  of,  16, 19 ;  transposition  (inversion)  of  same,  18.  See  also 
Omission,  Doubling. 

Intervals,  doctrine  of,  13. 

Interval,  steps  and  skips,  augmented  and  diminished,  156. 

Inversion,  47  ;  of  triads,  47  ;  of  seventh-chords,  59,  62,  78 ;  see  also  Interval. 

Inverted  intervals,  18. 

Leading  tone,  37,  39,  56,  76, 116, 159,  203. 

Major  triad,  22,  64. 

Melody,  formation  of,  176;  rhythmical  formation,  177. 

Middle  parts,  23. 

Minor  triad,  22,  33,  64. 

Modulation,  102 ;  means  of,  141 ;  extension  and  completion  of  the  same,  148. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY.  H 

Motion,  direct,  contrary,  oblique,  26. 

Movement,  one-part,  185;  two-part,  193;  three-part,  187;   four-part,  23;  five-part,  202, 

six,  seven,  eight-part,  206. 
Ninth,  14;  major,  minor,  15,  16. 
Ninth-chord,  88,  118,  127. 

Ninth-suspension,  1 18.  * 

Numbering,  34,  48,  53,  55,  59,  63,  111,  164. 
Oblique  motion,  26. 

Octave,  13;  perfect,  augmented,  diminished,  15,  16. 
Octave  progressions  (parallel  octaves),  26,  28 ;  open,  30,  110, 133  ;  concealed,  30,  86,  52,  84 

158,  204  ;  in  contrary  motion,  201. 
Omission  of  intervals,  57,  73,  188,  193. 
Organ-point,  123. 
Part-management,  24. 
Part-movement,  26. 

Parts,  extreme,  23  ;  middle,  23 ;  formation  of  accompanying  parts,  183. 
Part-writing,  pure,  strict,  free,  24 ;  pure,  137. 
Passing,  passing  notes,  128,  134. 
Passing  chords,  138. 
Period,  177. 

Plagal  cadence,  33,  41,  213. 

Position  of  the  chord,  close,  open,  dispersed,  31,  32,  114. 
Preparation  of  seventh,  70;  of  suspension,  107. 
Prime,  13  ;  perfect,  augmented,  15  ,  16, 
Principal  seventh  chord,  54,  64. 
Principal  triads  in  major,  23,  33  ;  in  minor,  40. 

Progression,  melodious,  nnmelodious,  155, 156 ;  of  collateral  seventh-chords,  65,  73,  81. 
Relation  of  parts,  1 73. 
Resolution  of  the  dominant  seventh  chord,  55,  61 ;  of  collateral  seventh -chords  (in  major) 

65;  (in  minor)  74  ;  of  suspensions,  106,  109,  116,  120. 
Scale.     See  Triads. 

Second,  13;  major,  minor,  augmented,  15,  16. 

Second  progressions  (parallel  seconds  J  in  passing,  134 ;  with  appoggiaturas,  136. 
Second  step,  augmented,  44. 
Sequence,  37. 
Seventh,  13  ;  major,  minor,  diminished,  15,  16  ;  passing,  72,  173  ;  preparation  of,  70 ;  same 

without  preparation,  72,  77,  153,  164. 
Seventh-chord,  21,  54 ;  Dominant-seventh-chord,  54,  57,  61, 82, 144 ;  fundamental,  64 ;  same 

in  passing,  139. 

of  the  seventh  degree  In  major,  68,  78,  90,  199. 
diminished,  76,  79,  87,  90 ;  same  in  modulation,  146 ;  same  in  movement  of 

several  parts,  206. 
Seventh-chords,  connection  of,  73;  same  in  connection  with  chords  of  other  degrees,  81,86; 

view  of  the  same,  100. 

Seventh-progressions  (parallel  sevenths)  in  passing,  134 ;  with  appoggiaturas  136. 
Signatures,  53. 

Sixth,  13  ;  major,  minor,  augmented,  15,  16. 
Soprano,  23  ;  soprano  notes,  soprano  clef,  113. 
Style,  free,  strict,  24. 
Sub-dominant  triad,  23. 


12  MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 

Suspension,  105, 109 ;  in  the  Bass,  111 ;  from  below,  116 ;  in  several  parts,  117, 198. 

Sustained  parrs,  123,  126. 

Tenor,  23 ;  Tenor  notes,  Tenor  clef,  113. 

Tenth,  14. 

Thesis,  107,  138. 

Third,  13,  21 ;  major,  minor,  diminished,  15, 16.  Same  in  seventh-chord,  56,  57,  60.  (Set 

leading-tone.^) 
Thirteenth,  14. 

Tliarough  Bass  notation,  see  Numbering. 
Tones  foreign  to  tlie  harmony,  105. 
Tonic  triad,  23,  142. 
Transition.    See  Modulation. 
Transposition,  47 ;  see  Inversion. 

Triad,  21 ,  major,  minor,  22 ;  dominant  triad  (in  major),  23 ;  (in  minor),  40 :  tonic  do. 
23;  (in  modulation)  142;   subdominant,  do.  23;   doable  diminished,  do.  95; 
major  diminished,  do.  95,  97  ;  augmented,  43,  65,  92. 
diminished,  do.  34,  38,  43,  50,  65. 
Triads  of  major  scale,  21,  33, 46,  99 ;  of  minor  scale,  40,  42,  46,  99 ;  natural  connection 

of  game,  22  ;  view  of  46,  99. 
Tritonet  70,  168. 
TweJJlh,  14. 
Unison,  13. 

Unison-progressions,  28 ;  concealed,  162, 204. 
Upper  interval*,  18. 
WhoU  cadence,  218. 


INTRODUCTION. 


OF  the  elementary  requirements  included  in  the  general  science  of  music, 
a  knowledge  of  which  must  be  assumed  at  the  commencement  of  the  study 
of  harmony,  that  which  stands  in  the  closest  relation  to  it,  the  doctrine  of 
Intervals,  will*  be  primarily  discussed  in  a  brief  and  concise  manner. 

Doctrine  of  Intervals. 

By  Interval,  Intermediate  Space,  is  meant  the  relation  in  which  one  tone 
stands  to  another  in  respect  of  distance. 

The  length  of  distance  is  immediately  determined  by  the  number  of  de- 
grees on  which  they  stand  apart  from  each  other,  and  according  to  this  rule, 
that  the  lower  tone  be  considered  as  on  the  first  degree,  and  the  higher  be 
numbered  according  to  the  diatonic  degrees  lying  between. 

REMARK.  —  By  diatonic  degrees  is  understood  the  series  or  succession  of  tones  repre- 
sented by  the  scale  of  any  major  or  minor  key. 

Take  for  example  g  as  the  lower  tone  on  the  first  degree,  then  the  o  above 
is  on  the  second,  the  e  above  on  the  sixth  degree : 


The  numbering  of  degrees  thus  resulting  is  expressed  as  follows : 


I 


Unison  of  Prime.  Second.   Third.     Fourth.    Fifth.       Sixth.    Seventh.    Octave. 


14  MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 

Generally  we  count  only  to  the  Octave,  and  begin  the  series  again  with  the 
tones  beyond,  and  so  on  with  each  new  octave  ;  so  that  the  ninth  degree  be 
comes  a  second,  the  tenth  a  third,  the  eleventh  a  fourth,  &c. ;  in  like  manner 
the  fifteenth  becomes  an  octave  again,  and  the  sixteenth  a  second. 

Reasons,  however,  which  find  their  explanation  in  the  harmony  system 
and  in  theory  generally,  sometimes  give  occasion  for  naming  tones  lying 
above  the  octave  according  to  the  actual  number  of  degrees.  The  series  of 
intervals  from  the  octave  up  will  therefore  receive  the  following  double 
designation : 

Octave.     Ninth.    Tenth.    Eleventh.   Twelfth.  Thirteenth.  Fourteenth.  Fifteenth. 


Second.     Third.    Fourth.       Fifth.       Sixth.         Seventh.        Octave. 

Longer  distances  of  two  tones  are  simply  reduced  to  their  relation  in  the 
lower  octave. 

More  Exact  Designation  of  Intervals. 

It  is  easily  seen  that  the  above  representation  of  intervals  is  based  upon 
the  diatonic  scale  of  C  major,  and  that  the  relations  of  the  intermediate  tones 
are  not  touched  upon.  These  are  based  in  like  manner  upon  the  first  tone 
of  the  diatonic  scale,  whilst  any  tone  of  the  scale  may  be  taken  as  the  lower 
one ;  by  which  the  tones  of  the  different  degrees  become  changed,  and  also 
in  these  slight  variations  will  appear. 

In  order  to  obtain  a  clear  view  in  these  manifold  variations,  the  following 
rules  may  be  observed : 

• 

The  series  of  Intervals  exhibited  above,  where  the  lower  tone  is  the  FIRST 
tone  of  the  major  scale,  and  the  series  itself  forms  the  scale,  serves  as  the  basit 
for  determining  att  the  intervals.  These  intervals  are  all  called  MAJOR,  some 

PERFECT. 

No  chromatic  alteration  of  these  tones,  whether  upper  or  lower,  changes 
either  the  number  or  the  name  of  the  degree;  only  a  more  exact  designation 
becomes  necessary. 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 


15 


For  instance,  if  a  sharp  be  prefixed  to  the  Fifth  *  it  will  still  be  a  Fifth, 
only  a  more  precise  designation  is  necessary,  as  it  is  evidently  become  » 
different  Fifth  from  the  original  one. 


i 


or 


Now,  as  such  changes  of  intervals  arise  by  raising  or  lowering  them  chro- 
matically, the  following  terms  are  used,  serving  to  denote  them  mort 
closely . 

1.  Seconds,  Thirds,  Sixths,  Sevenths,  Ninths,  which  result  from  the  ma- 
jor scale  by  taking  its  first  tone  as  a  basis,  are  called  major  ;  Primes,  Fourths, 
Fifths,  Octaves,  perfect. 

2.  Lower  the  upper  tone  of  the  major  intervals  a  half  degree,  and  we  get 
minor  intervals. 

3.  Raise  the  upper  tone  of  the  major  and  perfect  intervals  a  half  degree, 
and  we  have  augmented  intervals. 

4.  Raise  the  lower  tone  of  most  of  the  perfect  and  minor  intervals  a  half 
degree,  and  diminished  intervals  result. 

To  1. 

Perfect.     Major.    Mayor.    Perfect.    Perfect.    Major.    Major.    Perfect.    Major. 


Prime.    Second.     Third.    Fourth.     Fifth.     Sixth.    Seventh.    Octave.    Ninth. 

To  2. 

Minor.  Minor.  Minor.  Minor.  Minor. 


I 


To  3. 


Second.  Third.  Sixth.  Seventh.  Ninth. 


Augmented.       Augm.  N.B.  Augm.  Augm.  Augm. 


Prime.  Second.         Fourth.  Fifth,  Sixth. 

N.  B.  —  Augmented  thirds,  sevenths,  and  ninths  do  not  occur  ic  harmonic  relation! 
Augmented  octaves  are  to  be  regarded  as  augmented  primes. 


16 


MANUAL    OF   MARMOMT 


To  4 


Diminished. 


Dim. 


Dim. 


Vim. 


Dim. 


90- 


±& 


f- 


.  Third.  Fourth.  Fifth.  Seventh.  Octave. 

/     REMARK. —Diminished  primes,  seconds,  sixths,  ninths,  are  harmonically  inconceivable, 
/  excepting  in  melodic  connections,  t.  e.t  in  relation  to  progressing  intervals,  not  to  those 
sounding  simultaneously. 

Observation  on  the  Formation  of  Diminished  Intervals. 

The  reason  why,  in  the  formation  of  the  diminished  intervals,  the  lower  tone  was  raised, 
whereas  a  similar  interval  would  result  if  the  upper  tone  were  lowered,  lies  in  the  peculiar 
relations  of  all  intervals  in  respect  to  inversion,  of  which  more  will  be  said  hereafter. 

Tabular  View  of  the  Intervals  most  in  use. 


PRIMES. 
Perfect.  Augmented. 


Major. 


SECONDS. 
Minor. 


Augmented. 


-&- 


THIRDS.  FOURTHS. 

Major.  Minor.          Diminished.       Perfect.       Augmented.     Diminished. 


FIFTHS 
Perfect.       Augmented.     Diminished. 


Major. 


SIXTHS. 
Minor. 


Augmented. 


i 


-e- 


SEVENTHS.  OCTAVES.  NINTHS. 

Major.         Minor.      Diminished.     Perfect.     Diminished.     Major.          Minor. 


Division  of  Intervals  into  Consonances  and  Dissonances. 

When  we  speak  in  music  of  consonant  and  dissonant  intervals,  we  under- 
stand thereby  not  those  which  sound  well  or  badly,  as  these  terms  might 
well  express  ;  but,  by  the  former,  such  as  stand  hi  a  pure,  satisfying  relation 
that  needs  no  further  distinct  connection  with  other  intervals  as  a  neces- 
sary consequence ;  by  the  latter,  such  as  point  distinctly  at  something  fur- 
ther, and  without  it  would  give  no  satisfactory  sensation. 

Consonances  include  the  intervals  termed  perfect,  and  major  and  minor 
thirds  and  sixths. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


17 


The  former  are  also  called  perfect  consonances,  the  latter  imperfect. 
Dissonances  are  the  major  and  minor  second,  major  and  minor  seventh,  and 
ill  the  augmented  and  diminished  intervals. 
Hence  results  the  following  table : 

I.  CONSONANCES. 

a.  Perfect. 
The  perfect  prime,  perfect  fourth,  perfect  fifth,  perfect  octave. 

1  4N.B.  5  8 


1 


N.  B.  —  The  peculiar  relation  of  the  fourth  will  be  explained  later  under  the  system  o/ 
harmony. 

b.  Imperfect. 
The  major  and  minor  third,  the  major  and  minor  sixth. 


-&- 


II.  DISSONANCES. 

The  augmented  Prime,  the  major,  minor  and  augmented  Second,  the  di- 
minished Third,  the  augmented  and  diminished  Fourth,  the  augmented  and 
diminished  Fifth,  the  augmented  Sixth,  the  major,  minor  and  diminished 
Seventh,  the  diminished  Octave,  the  major  and  minor  Ninth. 


Augmented  1 


Major.        Minor. 


Aug.  2 


Dimin.  3 


Aug.  Dimin.  4  Aug.  Dimin.  5 


==« 


I 


'or.    Minor.    Dimin.  7 


Dimin.  8  Major.         Minor. 


— fe? jag [-       ~ — g- 


18 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


Transposition  (Inversion)  of  Intervals. 

As  was  indicated  above,  in  determining  intervals  we  reckon  generally 
from  the  lower  tone.  When  there  are  reasons,  however,  for  determining  the 
relation  of  two  tones  reckoning  from  the  upper,  we  term  them :  Inverted  t»- 
iervals. 


For  example, 


-  d  is  the  Fifth  from  g,  but  g  the  inverted 


fifth  from  d.     It  is  easily  seen  that  the  interval  is  not  hereby  changed. 

It  is.  however,  otherwise  when  the  upper  interval  is  transposed  below  the 
tone  which  was  originally  the  lower,  that  is,  an  octave.  As  this  transposi- 
tion is  a  matter  of  special  importance  in  certain,  kinds  of  composition,  an 
explanation  may  here  follow. 

The  diatonic  major  scale  thus  transposed  will  assume  this  form : 


Upper  intervals.  1 

2 

3            4 

5             6 
n          -&- 

7 

8 

~(g- 

JL  0&.  ££i  c*  £>  g  g  &.&.  asu.  

Lower  intervals.  8 


6 


This  gives  the  following  series  of  numbers : 

1234567 
8765432 


that  is :  by  inversion  the  Prime  becomes  an  Octave^  the  Second  a  Seventh, 
&c. 

With  the  inverted  major  scale  as  a  basis,  the  following  may  be  observed 
of  all  the  intermediate  intervals. 

1.  All  PERFECT  intervals  when  transposed  an  Octave,  remain  PERFECT. 

2.  All  MAJOR  intervals  become  MINOR,  all  MINOR  MAJOR,  the  AUGMENTED 
DIMINISHED,  and  the  DIMINISHED  AUGMENTED. 

The  following  table  affords  a  general  view  of  all  the  inversions : 


ORIGINAL 
INTERVALS 

INVERSION 

PRIMES. 

Perfect.       Augmented. 
,_G  ^  ^_ 

Major. 

&         f 

SECONDS. 
Minor. 

./Iw^TnentetZ. 

ffi—  —  *  —  ^ 

OCTAVES. 
Perfect.         Diminished. 

Minor. 

SEVENTHS. 
Major. 

Diminished. 
_ 

§••      1 

1:               1      1                 H 

i    i  .. 

-3    t 

I^u 

i»-             ^             ^*            yr 

MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


THIBDS.  FOOBTHS. 

Major.  Minor.         Diminished.         Perfect.         Augmented.  Diminished. 


SIXTHS.  FIFTHS. 

Minor.  Major.         Augmented.         Perfect.        Diminished.   Augmented. 


FIFTHS. 
Perfect.       Augmented.    Diminished. 

b± 


SIXTHS. 

Minor.      Augmented. 


%+*=£=t^=i= 


FOUBTHS. 

Perfect.        Diminished.    Augmented.         Minor. 


THIKDS. 

Major.       Diminished. 


Jfo/or. 


SEVENTHS. 
Minor.         Diminished. 


OCTAVES. 

Perfect.  Diminished. 


Minor. 


SECONDS. 
Major. 


PBIMES. 
Perfect.  Augmented. 


-h 


75- 


An  exact,  thorough  knowledge  of  this  essential  transposition  of  intervals 
is  not  only  important  for  exercises  in  double  counterpoint,  but  facilitates  a 
comprehension  of,  and  insight  into,  simple  harmonic  structure,  wherefore  the 
Btudy  of  it  is  strongly  to  be  recommended. 

A  few  remarks  may  follow  here. 

The  reason  why  in  the  first  table  of  intervals  (p.  1 6)  all  diminished  inter- 
vals were  formed  by  raising  the  lower  tone  a  half  degree,  and  not  by  lower- 
ing the  upper,  can  be  clearly  seen  from  the  above  table  of  inversions.  Since 
diminished  intervals  result  from  augmented  by  transposing  an  octave,  this 

formation  comes  of  itself.     For  instance :  the  augmented  fourth 


must  necessarily  produce  the  following  diminished  fifth :  XL      <a — . 


20  MANUAL    OF   HARMON*. 

Likewise  the  perfect  fourth  belongs  originally  to  the  consonances,  since 
by  transposition  it  is  changed  to  the  perfect  fifth,  just  as  the  perfect  fifth 
can  produce  only  the  perfect  fourth ;  and  in  general,  a  dissonance  can  never 
result  from  a  consonance  by  transposition.  Mention  is  here  made  of  this, 
because  in  special  cases,  which  will  be  noticed  hereafter,  the  fourth  has  to  be 
regarded  like  some  of  the  dissonances,  which  in  former  tunes  induced  many 
theorists  to  pronounce  it  merely  a  dissonance. 

Likewise  it  becomes  clear  that  the  augmented  octave,  as  well  as  the 
ninths,  cannot  be  transposed,  as  they  can  never  fall  below. 

Other  kinds  of  transposition,  as  into  the  Tenth  and  Twelfth,  which  pro- 
duce entirely  different  results,  may  be  passed  over  here,  as  they  have  no 
influence  upon  our  immediate  studies. 

Since  a  complete  and  thorough  knowledge  of  all  the  intervals  is  indispen- 
sable for  the  studies  in  harmony  which  follow,  written  exercises  in  them,  as 
well  as  oral  solution  of  given  intervals,  will  greatly  facilitate  a  proper  con- 
oeption  of  them,  and  should  be  repeated  again  and  again. 


SYSTEM   OF   HARMON  ¥. 


COMBINATIONS  of  tones,  sounded  simultaneously,  and  composed  of  differ* 
cut  intervals  according  to  certain  fundamental  principles,  are  called  in  gen- 
eral terms :  Harmonies,  chords. 

The  science  of  Harmony  points  out  the  nature  and  kinds  of  chords,  and 
teaches  their  natural  treatment.  This  consists  in  the  proper,  natural  con- 
nection of  chords  one  with  another,  i.  e.  in  the  transition,  resolution,  blend- 
ing of  a  chord  in  and  with  the  following. 


SECTION   I. 

THE   PRIMITIVE    HARMONIES    AND    THE    CHORDS    DERIVED    FROM 

THEM. 

Among  the  different  chords  which  may  serve  as  the  harmonic  groundwork 
of  a  composition,  we  may  easily  distinguish  such  as  appear  independent 
without  a  determinate  relation  to  others,  from  those  which  clearly  point  to  a 
connection  with  other  chords,  consequently  are  not  independent.  Consonant 
and  dissonant  chords. 

To  the  former  belong  most  of  the  Triads,  to  the  latter  the  Seventh-chords. 
Both  kinds  form  the  primitive  harmonies  from  which  all  the  remaining 
chords  are  derived. 


CHAPTER  I. 

The  Triads  of  the  Major  Scale. 

A  Triad  is  formed  by  a  combination  of  three  different  tones.  The  lowest 
of  these  is  called  fundamental  tone,  to  which  are  added  its  Third  and  Fifth, 
for  example : 


21 


22  MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 

But  these  triads,  formed  from  c,  g  and  a,  exhibit  another  difference  in 
theJr  intervals.  While  the  triads  of  c  and  g  are  formed  here  with  major  Third* 
and  perfect  Fiftlis,  the  triad  of  a  contains  a  minor  Third  and  perfect  Fifth. 

A  triad  with  a  major  third  and  perfect  fifth  is  called  a  MAJOR  TRIAD,  one 
\with  a  minor  third  and  perfect  fifth  a  MINOR  TRIAD. 

Remark.  —  The  explanation  of  other  sorts  of  triads  cannot  follow  until  later. 

As  the  diatonic  scale  makes  up  the  substance  of  a  key,  and  forms  the 
groundwork  of  the  melodic  series,  so  also  the  triads,  which  are  built  upon 
the  different  degrees  of  the  scale,  will  form  the  essential  part  of  the  har- 
monic substance. 

Natural  connection  of  the  triads  of  a  key. 

The  triad  based  on  the  first  degree  of  a  key  must  indeed  be  the  most  im- 
portant, as  fixing  the  key ;  with  it,  however,  stand  others  in  the  closest  rela- 
tion, serving  to  explain  its  position. 

Viewing  the  triad  in  its  natural  form  as  third  above  third,  the  Prime  ap- 
pears as  the  fundamental  tone,  the  Fifth  as  the  highest  tone,  the  summit  as 
it  were. 


2.        =1^=1  Fifth. 


Prime. 

.  —  Any  further  addition  of  a  new  interval  would  either  alter  the  chord  or  double 
tones  already  present. 

The  chord  which  stands  in  the  closest  relation  to  this  must  indeed  as  an 
independent  chord  lie  wholly  outside  of  it,  but  yet  rest  upon  one  of  its 
tones.  This  tone  can  be  found  only  in  the  extreme  limits  of  the  chord, 
namely  c  and  g.  Therefore  G,  which  is  here  the  fifth,  will  become  the  root 
of  the  nearest  related  triad,  while  c  in  like  manner  will  form  the  summit,  the 
fifth  of  the  other,  whose  root  would  be  F. 

The  connection  of  these  three  chords  can  be  best  seen  in  this  form  : 


In  these  three  chords,  standing  in  the  closest  connection,  it  is  especially 
to  be  remarked  that  their  tones  include  the  entire  scale ;  that  they  form  the 
outlines  of  the  key,  and  that  they  are  and  must  be  the  most  frequently  used 
In  practice,  if  the  key  itself  is  to  be  clearly  and  distinctly  represented. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


On  account  of  their  importance,  special  names  have  been  assigned  tbero. 
The  first  chord,  resting  on  the  first  degree  of  the  scale,  is  called : 

THE  TONIC  TRIAD, 
the  second,  on  the  fifth  degree : 

THE  DOMINANT  TRIAD, 
the  third,  on  the  fourth  degree : 

THE  SUB-DOMINANT  TRIAD. 

Let  these  three  chords  be  ranged  in  their  order  in  the  scale,  and  they  will 
appear  thus,  without  showing  their  inward  connection  : 


I.  IV.        V. 

and  they  are  also  seen  to  be  all  major  triads. 

Application  of  the  above  Harmonies. 

In  applying  these  three  chords,  we  will  use  here,  as  also  with  chords  to 
be  treated  of  later,  four-part  harmony. 

Remark.  —  The  theoretical  connection  of  chords  can  be,  it  is  true,  well  represented  in 
its  manifold  relations,  with  three  parts.  It  would  however  keep  us  longer  from  our  prao- 
tical  object,  and  may  therefore  be  left  for  special  treatment.  Four-part  harmony  will  ever 
maintain  its  importance  as  the  foundation  of  all  kinds  of  composition. 

Every  harmony  is  regarded  not  as  a  mere  mass  of  tones,  as  often  appears 
in  Piano-forte  compositions,  but  we  divide  its  ingredients  into  four  special 
parts. 

The  upper  part  is  called  Soprano,  the  lowest  Bass,  the  two  together  the 
extreme  parts  ;  that  next  below  the  Soprano  is  termed  Alto,  that  over  the 
Bass,  Tenor,  both  together  the  middle  parts. 

The  following  is  an  arrangement  of  these  parts  in  score,  and  the  triad 
appears  thus : 

5. 


ALTO. 


TEKOB. 


24  MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 

For  the  three  upper  voices  special  clefs  are  used,  which  are  better  adapted 
to  their  compass  than  the  Violin  clef  employed  above,  and  of  which  we  shall 
speak  hereafter. 

To  obtain  an  easier  survey  of  the  parts,  we  will  adopt  in  our  next  exer- 
cises the  Piano-Forte  arrangement  of  parts,  and  not  take  a  separate  staff  for 
each  voice. 

The  distribution  of  parts  in  No.  5  will  stand  thus : 


BASS. 


These  different  parts  will  be  considered  in  a  double  relation:  first  in 
reference  to  the  progression  of  each  part  by  itself,  then  in  its  relations  to 
the  other  parts,  both  of  which  must  be  pure  and  well-constructed. 

The  result  of  these  two  conditions  constitutes  pure  part-management. 

This  purity  of  harmony  and  progression  is  attained  by  seeking  and  prac- 
tising what  is  natural  and  in  accordance  with  law  in  the  connection  of  har- 
monies. 

Hence  arises  what  we  term  pure  part-writing  or  severe  style,  which  im- 
poses rules  and  laws  resulting  from  the  nature  of  music  itself,  and  whose 
observance  will  affosd  the  surest  basis  for  a  subsequent  free  use  of  the 
materials  of  composition.  Exercises  in  this  style  render  the  judgment  keen, 
cultivate  the  sense  of  what  is  true  and  correct,  and  enlighten  the  taste. 


R&nark.  —  So  far  as  every  composition  should  be  the  result  of  &  right  use  of  all  availa- 
ble means  and  of  the  purity  (that  is,  natural  expression)  wrought  thereby,  the  term  pure 
part-writing  in  the  general  sense  would  as  a  matter  of  courser  equire  no  farther  explana- 
tion. In  the  narrower  sense,  however,  something  more  is  implied,  which  might  be  more 
closely  and  hotter  indicated  by  the  synonymous  expression :  strict  composition,  strict  style,  in 
contrast  with  the  free  style,  which  in  its  real  meaning,  as  opposed  to  the  pure,  is  not  to  be 
understood  as  impure  writing ;  for  this,  however  often  it  may  occur,  is  in  all  cases  to  be 
indicated  as  false,  whereas  the  free  could  in  the  main  be  founded  upon  what  is  legal  in  the 
pure. 

As  was  hinted  above,  by  the  term  pure  part-writing  in  the  narrower  sense  is  understood 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


25 


inch  as  in  the  natural  development  of  all  the  relations  of  tones  allows  the  fewest  deviations  from 
what  is  legal,  and  only  such  as  do  not  affect  what  is  essential  and  fundamental. 

If  the  idea  of  pure  part- writing  is  thus  in  general  determined,  yet  its  limits  are  not  yel 
drawn ;  and  it  is  precisely  this  that  creates  all  the  more  difficulties  for  the  beginner,  since 
the  limits  are  very  differently  fixed  by  theorists  themselves.  This  difficulty  has  induced 
many  of  them,  especially  some  of  the  more  modern,  to  say  no  more  of  pure  part-writing 
or  strict  style,  but  generally  to  commence  at  once  with  the  free  style  and  learn  the  harmo- 
nic laws  incidentally.  Whether  this  compliance  with  youthful  impatience,  which  does  not 
love  to  busy  itself  with  the  abstract,  this  tendency  to  premature  living  creation,  before  the 
organic  is  developed  into  a  creative  faculty,  can  bring  anything  to  real  maturity,  is  not  to 
be  farther  investigated  here. 

It  is  to  be  hoped  that  those  who  follow  the  views  of  this  book  and  let  their  studies  con- 
form thereto,  as  well  as  all  who  have  to  go  through  a  strict  school,  will  be  convinced  that 
their  freedom  for  future  work  will  by  no  means  be  lost  by  what  is  forbidden  them,  but, 
based  on  natural  principles,  will  develop  all  the  more  fully  and  powerfully.  Real  master- 
ship has  ever  learned  to  reach  the  greatest  intellectual  strength  when  under  restraint, 
whereas  the  wildest  fancies  frequently  give  evidence  of  mental  disease  and  weakness.  On 
the  other  hand  the  scholar  cannot  be  warranted,  where  rules  are  at  stake,  in  making  use 
of  principles  based  upon  exceptions,  such  as  may  perhaps  be  found  in  the  best  masters,  or 
in  general  in  wishing  to  produce  compositions,  when  his  business  is  to  perform  exercises 
theoretically  well. 

The  three  chords  thus  far  found,  when  applied  in  four-part  harmony,  will 
lead  to  remarks  and  observations,  from  which  certain  principles  and  rules 
are  to  be  established. 

Since  triads  contain  but  three  tones,  one  part  (interval)  must  be  doubled, 
when  four  are  lo  be  used. 


Each  interval  of  the  triad  may  be  doubled, 

but  in  most  cases  the  root  is  the  best  adapted  for  this  purpose,  more  seldom 
the  fifth  and  third,  and  the  last,  in  many  cases  to  be  pointed  out  later,  not  at 
all.  All  doubling  is  to  depend  on  a  good  and  correct  progression  of  parts. 

To  accomplish  the  connection  of  two  triads,  the  following  rule  is  to  be 
observed : 

When  there  is  a  tone  common  to  two  chords  that  are  to  be  connected,  it  u 
retained  IN  THE  SAME  VOICE. 


7. 


i 


§ 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


In  example  a  we  find  c  common  to  both  triads ;  the  Sopi  ano,  which  had 
the  first  c,  retains  it  also  as  fifth  in  the  next  chord.  So  in  example  Z>,  where 
g  in  the  alto  makes  the  connection. 

The  other  parts  move  to  the  nearest  tone,  as  in  a  the  Alto  from  g  to  a,  the 
Tenor  from  e  tof,  &c. 

When  no  tone  is  found  common  to  two  chords,  the  parts  must  be  moved 
independently  in  such  a  way,  that  no  one  shall  appear  in  PARALLEL  FIFTHS 
or  OCTAVES  with  another. 

In  order  to  explain  this  faulty  progression  more  fully,  we  shall  first  premise 
what  is  necessary  concerning  the  movement  of  parts  relatively  to  each 
other. 

The  movement  of  parts  with  respect  to  each  other. 
One  part  can  progress  with  another  in 

direct  motion        (motus  rectus), 
contrary  motion    (motus  contrarius)  and 
oblique  motion      (motus  obliquus). 

Direct  motion  takes  place,  when  two  parts  ascend  or  descend  simulta- 
neously, e.  a. 


Two  parts  move  in  contrary  motion,  when  one  ascends,  and  the  other 
descends,  e.  g. 


Oblique  motion  occurs,  when  one  of  two  parts  remains  upon  the  same 
tone,  while  the  other  moves,  e.  a. 


10. 


.I — &    ,  t 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


27 


These  three  kinds  of  movement  occur  promiscuously  in  chord  connections. 
Thus  in  example  No.  7 1.  the  direct  motion  appears  between  Soprano  and 
Tenor,  contrary  motion  between  Soprano,  Tenor  and  Bass,  and  oblique 
motion  between  the  Alto  and  the  rest  of  the  parts. 

The  above-mentioned  faulty  progression  in  parallel  Octaves  and  Fifths  can 
only  appear  in  direct  motion,  as  for  instance  when  two  parts  move  thus  by 
Rteps  or  skips : 


This  is  equally  a  fault  with  all  the  parts : 

The  following  harmonic  progressions  contam  both  errors : 


12. 


In  example  a.  there  are  parallel  octave  movements  between  Soprano  and 
Bass,  in  example  b.  between  Alto  and  Bass,  and  in  example  c.  between 
Tenor  and  Bass.  Parallel  Fifths  appear  in  a.  between  Alto  and  Bass,  in  b. 
between  Tenor  and  Bass,  and  in  c.  between  Soprano  and  Tenor,  as  well  as 
between  Soprano  and  Bass. 

The  mechanical  means  of  avoiding  these  and  similar  erroneous  progres- 
sions, is,  for  cases  like  the  above,  the  employment  of  contrary  and  oblique 
motion  in  the  parts,  i.  e.  the  voice  which  already  stands  an  octave  or  fifth 
from  another,  must  either  move  in  contrary  motion  thereto,  or,  if  the  follow- 
ing chord  contains  the  same  tone,  remain  stationary.  The  other  voices  then 
pass  to  the  tones  nearest  them  in  the  new  harmony. 

Thus  in  example  12  a.  three  voices  must  move,  one  remaining  still ;  in  & 
and  c.  contrary  motion  of  all  the  parts  to  the  Bass  is  to  be  employed,  fof 
instance : 


13. 


28 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


Remark.  —  The  reason  for  this  prohibition  of  the  octave  (that  of  the  unison  is  included) 
can  be  easily  found  in  the  necessary  independence  of  the  parts.  To  discover  the  reason  for 
prohibiting  the  progression  by  fifths  is  not  so  easy,  however  much  one  is  convinced  of  its 
necessity,  and  great  pains  have  ever  been  taken  to  express  it  clearly  and  definitely.  Let 
the  following  view  of  this  subject  be  examined. 

If  every  chord-formation  presents  for  itself  an  independent  whole,  which,  however  else  it 
may  be  shaped,  yet  in  respect  to  its  root  and  fifth  principally,  unites  itself  as  it  were  into 
a  circle  (the  Seventh  as  an  addition  is  here  out  of  the  question),  and  if  harmonic  connec- 
tions are  only  produced  when  two  chords  become  in  a  manner  merged  into  and  identified 
with  one  another,  it  is  obvious  that  two  chords  with  their  extremes,  fifth  following  fifth, 
do  not  become  thus  merged,  but,  when  placed  side  by  side,  appear  without  any  relation  to 
each  other.  This  is  easily  seen  by  comparing  the  following  formations : 


a. 


1 


Sevenths  form  essentially  no  new  chord,  nor  can  they  be  conceived  of  as  outside  the 
circle  of  the  primitive  chord ;  they  only  serve  to  mark  more  definitely  the  relations  of  two 
chords,  and  to  render  the  harmonic  connections  closer  and  firmer. 

Now  wherever  the  perfect  fifth  appears,  it  will  carry  in  itself  its  character  of  demarca- 
tion, and  whether  the  other  component  parts  of  the  chord  (the  contents  as  it  were  of  the 
fifth)  or  an  added  interval  like  the  seventh,  lie  above  or  below  it,  the  unpleasant  effect  of 
the  succession  of  two  perfect  fifths  will  always  be  traceable  to  the  lack  of  connection,  to  their 
isolated  nature. 

While  speaking  of  the  fifths  of  triads,  it  may  he  observed  further,  that  in  the  case  of 
perfect  fifths  which  arise  from  added  sevenths,  the  law  of  preparation  partly  indeed  of  itself 
prevents  parallel  fifths ;  but  in  the  case  of  the  progression  of  such  a  seventh,  forming  a 
perfect  fifth  with  another  voice,  to  a  succeeding  perfect  fifth,  the  unpleasantness  and  want 
of  connection  will  be  equally  perceptible,  just  because  this  lies  only  in  the  second  fifth, 
which  appears  without  connection,  for  example : 


15. 


9 


^ 


But  as  far  as  tlie  diminished  fifth  is  concerned,  which  in  the  Dominant  Seventh  chord 
under  certain  conditions  can  appear  even  unprepared,  its  entrance  without  preparation 
even  in  parallel  fifths  perfectly  justifies  the  views  above  expressed,  since  whenever  it  follow* 
the  perfect  fifth,  its  connecting  character  is  maintained,  but  when  it  precedes  it,  the  latter, 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY.  29 

to  say  nothing  of  farther  laws  of  progression,  at  once  departs  from  the  uniting  circle  of 
both  harmonies. 
Compare  the  following  passages : 


J_  j 


j^-., 


I 


asp 


V       \E3l 


&& 


16. 


Though  passages  like  the  following  are  often  found  in  compositions  of  the  stricter  style- 


17. 


it  is  to  be  understood  that  the  doubling  of  the  diminished  fifth  (the/)  requires  a  double 
progression  of  the  same,  and  the  consecutive  fifths  are  justified  as  lying  in  the  middle 
parts,  but  that  the  following.progressions  could  not  be  called  pure : 


18. 


i 


r — r 


partly  because  they  are  too  conspicuous  in  the  upper  part,  partly  because  the  above  con- 
dition of  a  necessary  double  progression  is  wanting,  although  passages  like  that  in 
No.  16  c.,  are  often  met  with. 

It  becomes  clear  here  also,  why  parallel  fifths  resulting  from  passing  notes  in  many 
cases  do  not  sound  as  disagreeably  as  those  discussed  above,  wherefore  many  theorists 
allow  them  as  faultless ;  this  however  is  not  to  be  admitted  unconditionally,  since  many 
of  them  are  based  upon  other  false  progressions  (for  example,  upon  concealed  fifths)  and  it 
is  not  to  be  denied  that,  when  widely  dispersed  and  of  sufficiently  long  duration,  their 
unpleasant  effect  is  obvious. 

This  is  not  the  place  to  treat  further  of  these  relations,  and  much  might  be  said  upon 
many  points,  as  for  instance  the  progression  of  the  fifth  in  the  augmented  chord  of  the 
Fifth  and  Sixth,  which  would  lead  us  now  too  far  away.  We  shall  be  led  back  to  this 
point  in  our  practical  exercises  by  individual  matters. 


JO  MANUAL    OF    HARMONY. 

If  the  meaning  of  the  above  explanation  be  too  obscure  for  the  beginner,  it  will  never 
theless  with  his  advance  in  knowledge  and  practice  and  his  necessarily  oft-repeated  study 
rf  the  whole  harmonic  system,  be  soon  understood. 

The  faulty  progression  of  parts  thus  far  mentioned,  we  call  open  fifth  and 
octave  progression. 

When  in  direct  motion  between  two  parts  the  second  interval  forms  a  fifth 
or  octave,  it  is  concealed,  e.  g. : 


Open  parallel  fifths  and  octaves  are  never  admissible  for  harmonic  connec- 
tions ;  respecting  the  value  or  futility  of  concealed  fifths  and  octaves  we 
shall  speak  hereafter  (chap.  17)*;  for  the  present  this  must  be  left  for  oral 
instruction,  as,  in  general,  with  a  proper  conception  of  the  exercises,  there 
will  be  no  immediate  opportunity  for  errors  of  this  kind. 

Remark.  —  The  beginner  will  do  well  in  writing  his  first  exercises  to  pay  no  attention 
whatever  to  concealed  fifths  and  octaves,  because,  by  too  anxiously  avoiding  them,  the  first 
principles  of  chord  connection  are  violated,  and  other  errors,  much  worse,  may  easily  arise. 
Many  things  will  in  the  sequel  bring  us  back  to  this  point,  and  be  especially  examined 
and  discussed. 

Exercises. 

The  use  of  the  three  principal  triads  musically  in  connection,  observing 
the  rules  thus  far  established,  will  be  the  next  exercise. 

We  will  select  for  this  purpose  some  Bass  progressions  like  the  following : 


on,       ])°   fV             1 

zcpzzjr^: 

1  &  .. 

&  ..         r^&_. 

20.  ^  \±t  &—\- 

0:     I 
3. 

—  -M4  —  • 

V        I       IV 

4  — 

V 

I 

'-&- 

1         \    f?  1 
M          j 

r\'»             '|    /£*       7 

i<^ 

^1                      >r>     I 

-      1 

*-}•                              f 

£r 

1 

1 

?       *  I  :~ 

1  —  : 

.a 

^^  1- 

-*  —  L 

Remark.  —These  and  all  the  lessons  that  follow,  serve  to  indicate  the  manner  and 
method  to  be  pursued  in  our  practical  exercises.  They  should  always  be  continued  as 
long  as  the  subject  in  hand  renders  needful. 

The  disposition  of  the  three  upper  parts  to  be  added  in  the  first  chord 
will  lead  us  to  further  important  remarks. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


31 


We  have  already  seen  in  example  5.  that  the  disposition  of  the  voices  in 
a  chord  may  vary  greatly.  This  disposition  of  the  voices  is  called  the 
position  of  the  clwrd. 

Close  and  Open  Position. 

A  chord  is  in  close  position,  when  the  three  upper  parts  lie  so  near  each 
•ther  that  neither  the  Soprano  nor  Tenor,  if  transposed  an  octave,  would  fall 
between  the  other  two,  though  the  Bass  be  far  removed,  e.  g. 


12. 


The  first  position  of  the  chord  a.  is  so  changed  in  £.,  that  the  former  e  of 
the  Tenor  is  given  to  the  Soprano  an  octave  higher ;  in  c.  the  case  is  the 
same  with  both  tones  g  and  e ;  hi  d.  the  c  of  the  Soprano  is  reversed  and 
put  an  octave  lower.  In  all  the  transpositions  the  distribution  is  changed, 
but  not  the  close  position. 

It  is  otherwise  when  the  chord  appears  in  open  position  (also  called  dis- 
persed position,)  which  is  the  case,  when  either  the  Soprano  can  be  placed 
between  the  Alto  and  Tenor,  or  the  Tenor  between  Alto  and  Soprano,  so 
that  the  close  position  shall  result  therefrom,  e.  g. 


22, 


In  a.  the  chord  appears  in  open  position,  by  placing  the  g  between  Alto 
and  Soprano  in  close  position,  6.,  likewise  in  c.  and  d.  In  /.  the  g  of  the 
Soprano  in  the  chord  e.  is  put  an  octave  lower  between  Alto  and  Tenor. 

But  the  following  disposition  of  the  parts  (No.  23)  would  not  be  an  open 
posi  tion  in  this  sense,  for  by  transposing  the  Tenor  the  disposition  of  the 


32 


MANUAL    OF    HARMONY. 


upper  parts  is  not  changed,  &.,  and  only  the  transposition  of  the  Soprano 
would  give  the  true  open  position,  c. 


b=l=iE^ 


i 


23. 


bzzg— : 


Although  the  open  position  renders  the  chord  fuller,  yet  it  should  not  be 
always  used,  and  for  our  first  exercises  is  not  compact  enough  to  be  clearly 
seen,  so  that  at  present  we  shall  give  them  in  close  position. 

Remark.  —  It  will  always  be  better  to  write  the  examples  at  first  in  close  position,  and  not  to 
use  the  open  position  until  later,  commencing  with  the  exercises  in  the  second  and  third  section,  where 
it  will  be  seen  of  itself  to  be  needed.  Beginning  with  the  open  position  the  scholar  continu- 
ally stumbles  upon  difficulties,  which  it  cannot  be  his  immediate  object  to  overcome,  and 
ar«  therefore  much  better  avoided. 

Usually  the  different  positions  do  not  appear  singly,  but  occur  promiscu- 
ously, according  as  the  movement  of  the  parts  requires. 

When  the  position  of  the  first  chord  is  determined,  those  following  are  no 
longer  so  free  as  regards  distribution  that  any  can  be  taken  at  pleasure,  but 
it  is  governed  by  the  rules  already  given  on  pages  13  and  14  for  connecting 
chords. 

This  chord  connection  and  movement  of  parts  in  the  first  exercise  No.  20 
can  proceed  thus : 


24. 


^•"••i  "&r^*m*  ~*&r 2?  °* 


i 


i 


C:    I 


IV 


The  natural  relation  of  these  chords  to  each  other  becomes  clear  in  the 
above  simple  example,  if  their  connection  be  closely  observed ;  but  especi- 
ally from  the  last  two  chords  may  be  seen  the  close  connection,  how  one 
completes  the  other.  The  sensation  of  return,  of  rest,  of  satisfaction,  which 
lies  in  this  combination,  renders  it  suitable  for  forming  the  close.  This  form 
of  cadence  through  the  dominant  chord,  which  inclines  to  the  triad  of  the 
tonic,  is  called,  when  the  latter  falls  upon  the  rhythmical  accent  or  on  a  good 
place  as  to  time,  the  authentic  cadence. 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 


25. 


•>       z?  »" 


Another  form  of  cadence,  which  is  formed  through  the  Sub-dominant 
triad,  as  above  in  No.  20,  4th  example,  is  called  the  Plagal  cadence. 


26. 


i 


IV  I 

Of  these  and  other  kinds  of  cadences  we  cannot  speak  at  length  until 
later. 

In  order  to  become  familiar  with  the  succession  of  chords  which  arises, 
when  the  Bass  moves  by  degrees  (as  in  example  24  F  —  G),  it  will  be  well 
to  write  out  the  succession  IV-V  and  V-IV  in  different  positions  and  keys. 

The  triads  of  the  remaining  degrees  of  the  Major  Scale. 

All  the  triads  of  the  remaining  degrees  of  a  scale  belong,  to  be  sure,  to 
one  and  the  same  key,  but  do  not  point  to  it  so  decidedly,  as  e.  g.  the  chord 
connection  V-I. 

These  triads  are  called,  to  distinguish  them  from  the  principal  triads, 

COLLATERAL  TRIADS. 

They  are  formed  upon  the  second,  third,  sixth  and  seventh  degrees  of  the 
scale. 


III 


VI 


vn- 


The  triads  of  the  second,  third,  and  sixth  degrees  are  seen  to  be  minor 
triads,  as  their  thirds  are  minor  and  their  fifths  perfect. 
The  triad  of  the  seventh  degree  is  essentially  different  from  the  rest) 


84  MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 

since  it  has  beside  the  minor  third  a  diminished  fifth  ;  it  is  therefore  called 
the 

DIMINISHED  TRIAD. 

As  an  easy  mark  of  recognition  we  take  for  the  minor  triads  small'  letters 
to  number  the  degree  on  which  each  is  built,  to  which  we  add  an  °  for  the 
diminished  triad,  as  above  vn°,  a  method  of  numbering  introduced  by  the 
theorist  G.  Weber. 

Now  the  triads  of  the  major  scale  collectively  will  stand  thus  : 


28. 


in        IV        V        vi       vu* 


Remark.  —  The  beginner  must  be  very  cautious  lest  he  regard  all  these  chords,  when 
they  appear,  as  tonic  triads,  an  error  which  greatly  obstructs  the  understanding  of  har- 
monic connections.  As  long  as  C  major  is  the  prevailing  key,  the  incidental  triads  of  G, 
F,  of  d  etc.  are  merely  the  chords  of  the  several  degrees  belonging  to  it  (the  key  of  C  major,) 
and  we  are  not  speaking  of  G  major,  F  major,  d  minor,  since  these  keys  do  not  appear 
independently. 

Hence  arises  an  ambiguity  in  chords,  which  it  is  well  to  heed.  Every  triad  can  belong 
to  various  keys.  The  C  major  triad  may  be : 


C:    I  F?    V  G:    IV 

If  therefore,  in  connection  with  this  chord,  we  speak  of  C  major  (meaning,  according 
to  ordinary  usage,  the  key,)  this  is  true  only  in  the  first  case,  where  the  C  major  triad 
occupies  the  first  degree,  but  in  all  other  cases  is  incorrect. 

Application. 

In  connecting  these  chords  with  each  other,  as  well  as  with  those  previ- 
ously fouud,  no  new  rule  is  immediately  necessary:  much  that  is  new, 
however,  will  appear  as  we  proceed. 

The  Bass  can  move  either  by  skips  or  by  degrees. 

In  the  former  case  there  will  always  be  connecting  tones  (degrees  com- 
mon to  two  successive  chords;)  in  the  latter,  the  parts  must  move  in 
contrary  motion,  according  to  the  above  rule  (p.  27,)  in  order  to  bring 
out  the  natural  connection  of  chords. 


UAtfUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


a.      TJie  Bass  moves  by  skips. 

6.    NB.  better. 


II        IV 


II  V 


— <S7 


I 


I 


II          VI  etc. 

Skips  in  tho  Bass,  as  in  these  examples  from  the  secor  i  degree,  can  be 
managed  similarly  from  all  the  remaining  degrees,  so  that  tones  common  to 
the  two  chords  shall  remain  in  the  same  voice. 

In  many  cases,  however,  there  are  exceptions  to  this  rule. 

In  example  30  at  NB.  there  is  a  progression  of  parts  formed  according  to 
the  above  rule,  which  contains  a  concealed  octave  between  Tenor  and  Bass, 
and  which  is  decidedly  improved  by  the  progression  which  follows.  Though 
the  local  connection  of  tones  be  wanting  in  the  latter  case,  yet  there  is  still 
an  inward  connection,  since  the  d  of  the  Soprano  hi  the  first  chord  can 
easily  be  conceived  of  as  doubled  hi  the  lower  octave,  by  which  the  connec- 
tion becomes  at  once  evident,  as  in  31 : 


31. 


Remark.  —  The  reason  why  precisely  this  tone  should  be  conceived  of  as  doubled, 
such  might  be  the  case  with  any  other,  is  hased  upon  the  fact  that  it  is  the  fandamenUA 
tone,  that,  in  fact,  which  gives  the  entire  chord  its  determinate  character. 

The  unpleasant  effect  of  the  above-mentioned  concealed  octave  consists  io 
this,  that  the  upper  part  moves  a  whole  tone ;  and  the  effect  is  still  more 
itartling  when  the  octave  is  contained  in  the  extreme  parts,  as  in  example 
32  in  a.  ^ 

«•  „-*»        *  ~          *,       c- 


32. 


86 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


By  the  contrary  movement  of  the  Bass  in  I.  the  progression  can  be  im- 
proved, also  by  the  contrary  movement  in  example  c.,  although  even  here 
there  is  a  succession  of  concealed  fifths  between  Soprano  and  Tenor.  (See 
the  remarks  under  example  34.) 

Remark.  —  In  the  cases  given  above,  we  are  not  speaking  of  absolute  errors.  When  we 
have  entire  liberty  as  to  the  movement  of  the  parts,  much  can  be  avoided  which  we  can* 
not  escape  under  other  circumstances,  e.  g.  in  handling  a  cantus  firmus,  a  motive;  or  when 
other  reasons  exist,  important  as  regards  the  composition.  The  corrections  are  here  cited 
only  from  an  absolutely  theoretical  standpoint.  Of  the  concealed  fifth  in  32  c.  we  shall 
speak  more  particularly  under  No.  34. 

The  unpleasant  effect  of  the  concealed  octave  vanishes  at  once,  when  the 
upper  part  moves  a  HALF  TONE,  e.  g. 


33. 


b.      The  Bass  moves  ty  degrees. 

Here  contrary  motion  is  constantly  to  be  employed,  e.  g. 
NB.  1.  better. 


84. 


=a=s= 


-77- 

—G  

...a 

—<y— 

\    *     1 

I 


V  vi 


IV 


ii 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


37 


Remarks  upon  these  Chord  Connections. 

Ill  all  the  progressions  used  in  NB.  1  and  similar  passages  which  follow, 
it  is  better  to  double  the  third  in  the  second  chord,  in  order  to  avoid  con- 
cealed fifths.  Their  unpleasant  effect  is  even  more  prominent,  if  the  chorda 
appear  in  open  position,  e.  g. 


•&L 


35. 


* 


mk 


The  progression  in  b.  is  preferable. 

If  these  concealed  fifths  occur  in  the  middle  parts,  they  are,  under  certain 
circumstances,  sooner  to  be  allowed,  not  being  so  prominent 


In  NB.  2  the  doubling  of  the  third  in  the  second  chord  Li  not  always  to 
be  resorted  to,  since  hi  general  the  doubling  of  the  seventh  degree  (in 
example  34  the  b  of  the  second  chord)  is  to  be  avoided. 

Of  the  use  of  this  tone,  called  the  leading  tone,  we  shall  speak  more  at 
length  in  the  exercises  which  follow. 

Exercises  to  be  written  out. 


37-§3E* 


3. 


4  NB. 


Tie  fourth  exercise  gives  occasion  for  some  remarks. 

The  progression  of  the  Bass  here  in  the  first  four  measures  proceeds  in  a 
regular,  consistent  manner.  Such  a  regular  harmonic  or  melodic  progression 
is  called  a  Sequence. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


This  consistent  progression  of  the  Bass  requires  also  an  equally  regular 
movement  of  the  other  parts. 

If  we  harmonize  this  passage  on  the  above  established  principles  of  con- 
necting chords  by  means  of  stationary  tones,  e.  g. 


this  object  will  not  be  attained ;  on  the  contrary,  the  progression  must  pro- 
ceed in  such  a  manner,  that  the  first  chord  hi  the  second  bar  shall  be  in  the 
•ame  position  with  the  first  in  the  first  bar,  so  that  the  connecting  tone  d 
ice*  n*>t  remain  in  the  same  part. 


39. 


NB. 


IV         ii      vi         in 


So  in  the  first  exercise,  on  account  of  the  sequehce,  concealed  octaves,  of 
which  we  spoke  above,  are  allowable,  if  they  are  not  in  the  extreme  parts. 
In  the  third  measure  in  exercise  4.  we  find  a  chord  not  heretofore  used. 


The  Diminished  Triad. 

It  is  based  upon  the  seventh  degree  of  the  major  scale,  and  is  less  inde- 
pendent than  the  triads  thus  far  found,  as  it  points  distinctly  to  one  progres- 
sion, caused  by  the  dissonance,  the  diminished  fifth. 

The  natural  progression  of  diminished  intervals  can  in  general  be  con- 
ceived of  thus,  that  either  both  tones  approach  each  other  one  degree  (a.), 
or  that  one  or  the  other  moves  while  the  other  remains  still  (3.,  c.),  a  method 
of  progression  which  only  becomes  plain  in  a  real  chord  connection. 


d.  e.    Inversion. 


40.fc=z« 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


39 


In  the  third  which  follows  the  diminished  triad  (d.)  the  triad  of  the  first 
degree  c  appears  incomplete,  the  fifth  being  omitted. 

Since  according  to  the  relations  of  intervals  heretofore  explained  (pp.  18, 
19)  as  regards  inversion  (transposition,)  an  augmented  fourth  results  from  a 
diminished  fifth,  so  their  progression  must  likewise  appear  in  an  inverted 
manner.  See  40  e. 

The  fundamental  tone,  upon  which  the  diminished  triad  is  based,  is  called 

LEADING  TONE. 

It  appears  again  as  third  in  the  dominant-triad,  and  as  fifth  in  the  triad  ot 
the  third  degree. 


vn° 

Since  the  LEADING  TONE  is  of  itself  very  distinctly  prominent,  it  is  NOT 
DOUBLED  in  simple  four-part  harmony. 

So  its  progression  should  be  to  ascend  a  half  degree,  when  the  chord  that 
follows  contains  this  tone. 

The  necessity  of  this  progression  lies  in  the  melodic  character  of  the 
leading  tone,  preceding,  as  it  does,  the  tonic  of  the  scale  by  a  half  tone. 
This  is  particularly  observable  in  the  dominant-triad,  if  the  leading  tone  be 
hi  the  highest  part ;  thus  a.  in  example  42  is  more  satisfactory  than  b.  and  c 

c.  d.  e. 


IjC^i  —  ££  —  

6"^  ^ 

£•  "" 

tz 

^ 

C^2 

42. 


This  upward  tendency  is  less  decided  in  the  middle  parts,  as  in  e?.  In 
many  cases  hi  such  chord  connections,  skips  hi  the  upper  part  (in  c.)  are 
positively  unendurable ;  and  skips  in  the  middle  parts  (in  e.)  are  to  be 
employed,  when  the  Bass  progresses  by  contrary  motion. 

In  example  39  in  the  third  measure  we  have  the  leading  tone  doubled 
and  progressing  contrary  to  the  above  rule.  Both  were  on  account  of  the 
sequence  contained  in  the  example,  which  allowed  no  change  either  of 
position  or  progression  of  the  chords. 

On  the  more  Complete  Formation  of  Cadences. 

The  cadence  by  means  of  the  dominant  chord  noticed  on  p.  32  (the 
authentic  cadence)  appears  in  the  last  examples  in  a  still  more  definite  form. 


40 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


That  is :  as  the  natural  relation  of  the  dominant  chord  to  tKc  tonic  triad 
renders  the  two  chords  suitable  for  the  formation  of  the  cadence,  so  there  is 
observable  in  these  examples  a  still  further  preparation  of  the  same  by 
means  of  the  triad  of  the  second  degree,  which  stands  in  the  same  relation  to 
the  dominant  chord,  as  the  dominant  chord  to  the  tonic  triad,  e.  g. 


43. 


II 


II 


Besides  the  triad  of  the  second  degree,  that  of  the  sub-dominant  is  also 
well  adapted  to  this  form  of  cadence,  e.  g. 


±4. 


IV     V 


The  forms  of  dosing  (cadences)  which  result  from  this  connection  of 
chords  will  assume  a  still  more  definite  shape  by  a  use  of  the  chords  to  bo 
explained  hereafter. 


CHAPTER  H. 
The  Triads  of  the  Minor  Scale. 

a.     Principal  Triads. 

THE  principal  triads  of  the  major  scale  were  found  upon  the  fast,  fourth 
and  fifth  degrees.  On  the  same  degrees  we  find  also  the  principal  triads  of 
the  minor  scale. 

The  relation,  however,  in  which  the  dominant  triad  stands  to  the  tonic 
chord,  as  it  is  seen  with  special  clearness  in  the  cadence-form  above  shown, 
necessitates  the  alteration  of  one  tone  of  the  minor  scale. 

The  seventh  degree,  which  according  to  the  signatures  of  the  minor  key  is 
always  a  whole  tone  removed  from  the  eighth  degree,  is  raised  chromatically 
a  half  tone,  so  as  to  receive  the  character  of  the  leading  tone.  e.  g. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


41 


45. 


NB. 


By  this  means  the  dominant  triad  in  minor  is  formed  exactly  like  that  in 
major,  thus : 

A  minor.       A  major. 

a:  V  A:  V 

or  to  speak  briefly : 

The  dominant  triad,  both  in  major  and  minor  keys,  is  always  major. 
This  is  plainly  seen  by  comparing  the  cadence-form  of  both  keys : 
C  major. C  minor. 

i         &  £~  & 


47. 


i 


That  the  sixth  degree,  however,  of  the  minor  scale  is  in  a  harmonic  sense 
not  capable  of  any  chromatic  change  by  raising  a  half  tone,  as  is  often 
required  in  a  melodic  relation,  is  proved  by  the  plagal  cadence  a.  (see  p.  33) 
which  cannot  be  conceived  of  at  all  as  in  b. 


in  A  minor, 
a. 


c:    iv 


The  three  principal  triads  in  minor  can  be  represented  in  their  most 
natural  relation,  as  formerly  explained,  thus : 


T     x      V 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


The  minor  scale,  therefore,  as  a  basis  for  harmonic  formations,  will  stand 

thus: 

l       t       t       1       i     1ft      ft 


50. 


Remark.  —  All  other  forms  of  the  minor  scale,  as 

51. 
or  descending : 


52. 


I 


rest  upon  melodic  conditions,  which  do  not  admit  of  the  interval  of  the  augmented  secona, 
found  in  No.  50  between  the  sixth  and  seventh  degrees. 

Abstractly  these  forms  have  no  influence  upon  harmonic  formation;  yet  the  harmonic 
sub-structure  reacts  upon  the  formation  of  the  minor  scale,  as  the  following  example* 
show: 


53. 


The  last  case,  where  the  descending  scale  has  this  very  interval  of  an  augmented  second 
6  —  a  flat,  which  in  the  sequel  we  shall  carefully  avoid  in  harmonic  connections,  is  explained  in 
this  way,  that  6  was  necessary  as  a  component  part  of  the  chord,  but  ab,  in  order  not  to 
destroy  the  minor  character  of  the  passage,  which  is  strikingly  the  case  with  a,  while  in 
the  ascending  scale  (in  the  first  example)  this  is  already  perfectly  preserved  by  the  minor 
third  eb. 

b.      The  Triads  of  the  other  Degrees  of  the  Minor  Scale. 
SECONDARY  TRIADS. 

According  to  the  establishment  of  the  minor  scale,  the  secondary  triad* 
appear  in  the  following  form : 


54. 


n°   NB.   iv 


VI  vir 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


43 


The  second  degree  gives  a  diminished  triad,  as  formerly  the  seventh 
iegree  of  the  major  scale:  likewise  a  diminished  triad  is  found  on  the 
seventh  degree.  The  sixth  degree  forms  here  a  major  triad. 

The  third  degree  brings  a  new  form  of  the  triad. 

It  has  a  major  third  and  an  augmented  fifth,  and  is  called  therefore 


THE   AUGMENTED   TRIAD. 


From  the  forced  or  strong  connection  of  this  chord  with  others  of  the 
same  key,  it  can  seldom  appear  as  the  fundamental  harmony  of  the  third 
degree  of  the  minor  scale.  The  following  examples  may  prove  this : 


55. 


!• 

s 

&.  JO  

& 

&} 

<v 

. 

VI 


vn° 


Of  these  examples  those  under  c.  and  e.  will  be  the  most  practicable. 
The  introduction  of  this  chord  appears  still  more  difficult : 


a. 


56. 


Its  introduction  is  the  most  tolerable,  when  the  augmented  fifth  is  pre- 
pared, i.  e.  is  already  present  in  the  same  voice  as  a  member  of  the  preceding 
chord  ^(in  d.). 

Remark.  —  There  exists  something  peculiarly  foreign  in  the  chords  of  the  third  degree 
as  well  in  the  major  as  in  the  minor  scale,  so  that  this  harmony,  even  when  it  appears 
simply  as  a  minor  triad  as  it  does  in  the  major  scale,  can  with  great  difficulty  be  connected 
naturally  and  effectively  with  other  chords,  and  therefore  seldom  occurs. 

Most  of  the  practical  chord-connections  indicated  above  will  occur  in  other 
relations,  and  not  allow  the  augmented  triad  to  be  recognized  as  the  third 
degree  of  the  minor  scale.  The  augmented  triad,  which  is  very  often  used  hi 
more  modern  music,  belongs  to  the  chromatically  altered  harmonies,  which 
will  hereafter  be  explained  under  the  name  of  Altered  Chords.  (See  chap.  10f 
Altered  Chords.) 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


Application. 

The  principles  already  developed  of  harmonic  connection  and  part  move- 
ment will  be  valid  here  also,  and  what  was  said  above  concerning  the 
progression  of  the  leading  tone,  is  eminently  applicable  to  the  connection 
of  the  principal  chords  in  minor,  since  the  interval  of  the  augmented  second 
from  the  sixth  to  the  seventh  degree  in  the  minor  scale,  as  well  as  from  the 
seventh  to  the  sixth  descending,  is  to  be  avoided  as  unmelodious,  when  the 
two  tones,  which  include  the  interval,  belong  to  different  harmonies,  e.  g. 


57. 


V          VI  VI          V 


In  connecting  therefore  the  chords  of  the  fifth  and  sixth  degrees,  which 
very  often  happens,  the  leading  tone  must  always  ascend,  by  which  in  the 
triad  of  the  sixth  degree  the  third  appears  doubled,  e.  g. 


58. 


VI 


VI 


V      VI       VI 


VI 


Hence  it  would  be  impossible  to  present  correctly  the  example  given 
inder  57  6.;  unless  an  intermediate  tone  were  used,  as  thus : 


69. 


i 


Eemaric.  —  In  certain  special  cases  practice  deviates  from  this  rule.  It  will  be  well, 
however,  to  adopt  the  progression  indicated  above,  for  the  reason  that  it  should  not  be 
overlooked,  that  every  deviation  from  rules  in  practice  has  and  should  have  a  stated  nutive, 
whereas  in  numerous  other  cases  the  observance  of  them  is  still  recognized. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


45 


Exercises  for  Connecting  the  Triads  of  the  Minor  Scale. 
L  2. 


m 


Remarks  upon  these  Exercises. 

A  chromatic  sign  over  a  Bass  note  without  a  figure,  as  e.  g.  in  the  third 
measure  of  the  first  exercise,  always  has  reference  to  the  third  of  the  Bass. 
This  raising  of  the  third  in  the  dominant  chord,  as  very  often  happens  in 
minor,  is  the  raising  of  the  leading  tone  spoken  of  on  p.  41. 

In  general,  when  the  Bass  has  the  root,  the  triad  is  not  figured  in  Thorough 
Bass  writing,  and  there  must  be  special  reasons  for  figuring  with  3,  or  5,  8, 

,  8 

o'  or  fully  with  5. 

3 

In  the  third  and  sixth  exercises  there  is  a  reason  for  figuring  with  5.  The 
introduction  of  the  triad  of  the  third  degree  in  minor  has  here  been  attempted, 
and  it  was  necessary  to  indicate  the  elevation  of  the  fifth,  since  it  forms 
likewise  the  seventh  degree  of  the  minor  scale. 

Where  a  3  or  5  is  givon  with  the  first  chord  of  some  exercises,  it  has 
reference  to  its  position.  On  this  point  see  remarks  under  exercises  (p.  50.) 

The  principles  thus  far  developed  will  be  verified  by  filling  out  one 
exercise.  We  take  the  first  for  this  purpose. 


NB. 


61. 


The  first  principle  of  chord-coonection  (through  connecting  tones  in 
the  same  voice)  is  observed  here  throughout,  and  therefore  in  the  third 


MANUAL    OF    HARMONY. 


measure  (at  NB.)  the  Alto  makes  the  erroneous  progression  of  an  atig« 
mented  second  from/  to  g%. 

To  avoid  this  error  (according  to  p.  44,)  it  will  be  necessary  to  let  the  Alto 
move  from  f  to  e,  the  Soprano  from  b  to  g  #,  and  the  Tenor  from  d  to  6, 
thus. 


(a  connection  of  chords  already  explained  in  No.  31,  where  the  tone-con- 
nection did  not  take  place  in  the  same  voice,)  or :  the  Soprano  retains  the  5, 
the  Tenor  descends  from  d  to  g%,  and  the  Alto  from  /  to  e,  by  which  the 
close  position  is  left,  and  this  and  the  following  harmony  appear  in  open 
position : 

± 


63. 


Further  remarks,  rendered  necessary  by  the  difficulties  of  progression  as 
regards  the  chords  of  the  fourth,  fifth  and  sixth  degrees,  are  in  special  cases 
to  be  left  for  practical  guidance. 

Before  we  pass  on  to  the  further  use  of  triads,  we  shall  give  a  synoptical 
view  of  the  chords  thus  far  found  as  follows. 

View  of  all  the  Triads  of  the  Major  and  Minor  Scales. 

Major. 
64. 


n°    III'    iv     V     IV   vn° 
in  major. 


in  minor. 


Major  triidt  are  found 


I 


IV    V 


V      VI 


MANUAL    OF   EARMON7. 


47 


Afinor  triads. 


Diminished  triads. 


Augmented  triads. 


in  Major  : 


in  Minor  : 


ft          . v~.    . 

U       III       VI  I         ,T 

in  Major.       in  Minor. 


m 


VII0 
in  Minor. 


n° 


CHAPTER  HI. 

Inversions  of  Triads. 

Chord  of  the  Sixth,  Chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth. 

THE  use  of  triads  and  of  all  fundamental  chords  generally,  is  not  limited 
to  this,  that  the  root,  as  in  all  previous  examples,  shall  lie  in  the  Bass  ;  the 
Bass  can  also  take  the  third  or  the  ffth  of  the  fundamental  chord.  Hence 
arise  transformations  of  the  fundamental  chords,  which  we  call 

INVERSION,  TRANSPOSITION,  INTERCHANGING 
of  the  chord. 

Remark.  —  It  may  well  be  observed  that  we  are  here  speaking  only  of  moving  the  Bass  into 
another  interval,  and  that  the  transpositions  before  mentioned  of  the  other  parts  into  close 
tnd  open  positions  and  into  various  intervals  by  no  means  change  the  chord  essentially 


The  Triad  is  capable  of  two  inversions  : 

a.      When  the  Bass  takes  the  third  of  the  triad,  we  have 

SIXTH. 


CHORD  OP  TBffl 


Fund,  chord. 


Chord  of  Sixth. 


65. 


1=1 


Third 
of  fund,  chord. 


48  MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 

b.      When  the  Bau  takes  the  fifth  of  the  triad,  we  have  the  Chord  of  th* 

SIXTH-AND-FOURTH. 


Fund,  chord.  Chord  of  Sixth  &  Fourth. 


of. 

The  Chord  of  the  Sixth  is  indicated  by  6  over  the  Bass  note,  the  Chord 
of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth  by  \  over  the  same,  e.  g. 


H:- 

OL  14. 

0 
0:  I 

0 

0 

I 

Hereafter  to  indicate  the  root  we  shall  use  the  letter,  and  to  indicate  the 
degree,  as  formerly,  the  number,  by  which,  as  may  be  seen  in  example  67, 
only  the  position  of  the  root,  not  the  casual  Bass,  is  to  be  regarded. 

Remark.  —  As  the  root  of  the  chord  of  the  Sixth  and  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth  in  example 
67  is  still  C  and  not  the  Bass  notes  E  and  G,  so  the  chord  itself  will  not  be  based  on  the 
third  or  fifth,  but  still  on  the  first  degree,  since  these  are  by  no  means  newly-formed  chords, 
but  only  by  means  of  the  Bass  brought  into  another  position,  and  are  therefore  derived 
chords. 

Application. 

By  using  the  inversion  of  chords,  there  results  not  merely  a  greater 
variety  in  the  management  of  the  harmony,  but  the  movement  of  the  parts, 
especially  the  Bass,  becomes  more  flowing. 

According  to  the  rules  given  on  p.  25  respecting  the  doubling  of  one 
interval  of  the  triad,  it  will  be  better  in  the  chord  of  the  Sixth  also  in  four- 
part  harmony  to  double  the  root  of  the  primitive  chord,  and  the  doubling  of 
the  Bass  tone  in  the  chord  of  the  Sixth  (i.  e.  the  original  Third)  or  of  the 
third  of  the  Bass  (i.  e.  the  original  Fifth)  can  only  take  place  when  the 
natural  movement  of  the  parts  requires  it,  or  when  false  progressions  can  be 
thereby  avoided.  In  accordance  with  what  was  said  on  p.  39,  it  may  be 
remarked  further  that  the  leading  tone  in  like  manner  forms  an  exception  to 
this  doubling,  when  it  lies  in  the  Bass. 

It  need  barely  be  mentioned  too,  that  the  distribution  of  the  three  upper 
parts  depends  only  on  their  movement,  but  has  no  other  essential  bearing 
upon  the  chord. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY.  40 

The  Chord  of  the  Sixth  can  therefore  occur  in  the  foil  owing  forms : 


68. 


The  use  of  the  Chord  of  the  Sixth-and- Fourth  is  less  frequent  than  that 
of  the  Chord  of  the  Sixth,  and  requires  certain  conditions,  which  will  be 
mentioned  later.  We  find  it  mostly  in  the  formation  of  cadences.  The 
Bass  tone,  the  Fifth  of  the  primitive  chord,  is  the  best  adapted  for  doubling, 
and  the  chord  will  appear  in  the  following  and  similar  forms : 


69. 


For  connecting  these  chords  with  others,  no  farther  mechanical  rules  are 
needed  than  those  already  given ;  in  like  manner  we  omit  the  mere  mechan- 
ical combination  of  two  and  three  chords,  and  exhibit  the  application  of 
these  derived  chords  in  short  pieces,  which,  however  insignificant,  contain 
the  form  of  a  complete  whole,  and  admit  of  a  better  estimation  of  single 
in  their  relation  to  the  whole. 


Exercises. 


1-                         6 

6                                       6                          43 

r  r*  —  «•  —  =  4-f  H- 

7f>-  rr       (p        ^       ^ 
2-      5                           6 

-4_f-  .  p  ^__*q.____.  «_4], 

6                                           6 

rv^L,  1  —  &  r- 

—  ~j  —  H~~"  —  ~!  i  !  H  :  — 

:_^  —  9        .    B      jj  ^  \  £  —  1_|  

i  —  1  1  

3-                        6       6 

p_  j  —  -^  —  T  

6 
664 

<2        ^ 

r^"(p    t)     -'"    —  ^ 

„[  1  C               .    j  ^   ||. 

4>      3       6                     6 

L                1  —  |  1  1  (-  1  ^  —  L  LL 

6                                                                                  6 
43                 66                     6                        43 

T                            It                  i     1                                II 

1    S3            &          _d                                                                         \       *3        -                         II 

**^           XiJ          t 

~\  &                   O         1A                                       \     &      •               •    ||- 

'                t                                           cJ       &                          &          ^ 

5.                666 

6              66                        6.         366              66 

•^      '  -  P       (                                 !        i.                     '    1          '      P        '          &           S3     l 

"in    2?       ^    ^       1 

\  lr                   \-      "          r   I 

4  U-L-  .  |-lt  L_J—  .  -4  t-J 

50 


MANUAL    OF    HARMONY. 


66                   V  7.         36               5                              66                    43 

Hf— 

2?  —  /5  — 

i  rH         ^? 

?  _.t  . 

:    A     j   t—  J—  it=- 

-y 

—  £L  J 

fj 

i^ 

^ 

IOT    —  j^— 

ZS     2 

•      # 


9.     3       6 


y 


6          6       # 


nzzztufcc — <g-+-^  f 

•Jr-T^g^-T-i ^-F^^-^^tt 


* 


Remarks  upon  these  Exercises. 

The  designating  of  the  fifth  in  the  first  measure  of  example  second,  as  well 
as  all  similar  indications  hereafter,  shows  the  position  of  the  Soprano,  con- 
sequently that  of  the  first  chord.  When  there  is  no  figure  over  the  first  Bass 
note,  it  is  to  be  understood  that  the  Soprano  most  fittingly  takes  the  Octave 
of  the  Bass. 

The  diminished  triad  of  the  seventh  degree  appears  in  the  second  exer- 
cise as  a  Chord  of  the  Sixth.  It  is  in  this  position  that  it  most  frequently 
occurs.  It  may  be  remembered  here  that  the  root  of  this  chord,  being  the 
leading  tone,  is  not  doubled,  instead  of  which  in  most  cases  the  third  is 
doubled  (the  Bass  tone  in  the  chord  of  the  Sixth.)  The  movement  of  parts 
results  at  times  in  the  doubling  of  the  fifth  also.  The  diminished  triad  of 
the  second  degree  in  minor  allows  the  root  also  to  be  doubled. 

The  progression  of  the  diminished  triad  always  depends  on  the  movement 
of  the  Bass.  The  natural  tendency  of  the  diminished  triad  in  its  funda- 
mental position  has  been  already  shown  on  p.  38. 

In  most  cases  the  Bass  moves  thus : 


71. 


and  the  other  parts  as  follows : 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


It  follows  from  the  above  examples,  that  the  inversion  of  the  diminished 
fifth,  namely  the  augmented  fourth,  in  four-part  harmony  will  not  necessarily 
have  the  same  progression  as  was  given  above  in  two  parts  on  p.  38 ;  we  see 
in  the  first  example  and  others  b  and  f  in  the  Soprano  and  Alto  moving  to  c 
and  g : 

The  similarity  in  sound  between  this  chord  and  the  dominant-seventh- 
chord,  which  is  to  appear  later,  frequently  induces  beginners  to  make  the 
diminished  fifth  descend,  even  when  by  inversion  it  has  become  an  augmented 
fourth ;  this,  as  the  above  examples  show,  is  only  and  solely  necessary,  when 
actually  as  a  diminished  fifth  it  lies  above  the  root,  and  a  progression  like  the 
following 


is  wrong  on  account  of  the  parallel  fifths. 

Remark.  —  It  may  here  be  observed  further,  that  parallel  fifths,  of  which  one  is  dimitt- 
ished,  and  the  other  perfect,  are  allowable,  if  the  diminished  follows  the  perfect  fifth,  but  not 
the  reverse,  e.  g. 


good. 


not  good. 


75. 


Compare  also  Remark  on  p.  28. 

The  progression  of  the  parts  in  the  diminished  triad  takes  a  different 
form,  when  the  Bass  passes  to  any  other  chord  than  the  tonic  triad.  A  few 
chord  connections  may  follow  here : 


I 


vn°    in 


vn°  IV 


vn° 


52 


MANUAL    OF    HARMONY. 


letter : 


not: 


Ill ^2=$:==-*' — ni 

4l     *•— Tsr-^ff 


VII          VI 


not 


^^!E|^f:3^^^FF 
— T£=\\— v — ^-Hl-p^^ — FF 


*f       2J 

2 

•-ex 

2 

II 

vii  °     n 


and  others. 


The  diminished  triad  of  the  second  degree  in  minor  admits  of  a  different 
treatment,  since  its  root  may  be  doubled.  See  p.  50. 

A  succession  of  two  or  more  chords  of  the  Sixth,  when  the  Bass  moves  by 
degrees,  as  in  exercise  70.  No.  3  and  others,  will  compel  one  or  more  parts 
to  move  in  contrary  motion  to  the  Bass.  e.  g. 


77. 


66  66 


The  series  of  chords  of  the  Sixth  in  the  5th  and  6th  exercises  in  No.  70 
can  be  harmonized  indeed  in  different  ways,  but  it  will  be  best,  when  the 
regular  Bass  progression  is  retained  in  the  other  parts  also,  e.  g. 


6       &c. 


Concealed  octaves,  as  in  the  2d  and  3d  measures  between  Tenor  and  Bass, 
are  not  to  be  avoided  in  such  cases.  Hence  we  may  conclude,  that  to  INDI- 
YIDUAL  abnormal  progressions,  WHEN  PLACED  IN  COMPARISON  WITH  THE 
CONSISTENCY  OF  THE  WHOLE,  «* ?  art  not  to  attach  that  special  importance 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY.  53 

which  is  otherwise  their  due,  since  the  formation  of  details,  though  to  bo  as 
perfect  as  possible,  will  always  be  subordinate  to  that  of  the  whole. 

Remark.  —  Without  doubt  the  principle  just  laid  down  can  be  easily  misunderstood  by 
the  beginner ;  yet  its  statement  was  unavoidable,  and,  to  escape  all  possible  error,  it  maj 
6e  added  further,  that  a  final  decision  on  these  points  belongs  only  to  a  judgment  fullj 
ripened  by  experience  and  practice. 


The  Signs  used  in  Thorough  Bass  Writing. 

The  figures  and  signs  in  Thorough  Bass  are  called  in  general,  Signatures 
Some  of  them  have  been  already  explained,  as  the  chromatic  sign  so  often 
used  in  minor.  The  figuring  of  the  Chords  of  the  Sixth  and  of  the  Sixth- 
and-Fourth  was  given  on  p.  48.  A  line  through  the  figure  (e.  g.  in  exer- 
cises 8,  9,  10  under  No.  70  through  the  6:0)  is  used  when  a  chromatio 
elevation  of  the  interval  a  half  degree  is  needed,  instead  of  which,  however, 
a  #  or  k|  by  the  side  of  the  figure  is  often  used  (e.  g.  6#  or  6b|,  5t|).  Other 
figures  will  be  explained  hereafter  with  their  respective  chords. 


Formation  of  Cadences  by  irteans  of  the  Chord  of  the  Sixth- 
and-Fourth. 

In  the  exercises  70  we  find,  through  the  inversions  of  the  triad,  an  ex- 
tension and  more  determinate  form  of  the  cadence  previously  cited.  It 
appears  namely,  that  the  chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth  of  the  tonic  triad 
before  the  dominant  chord  leads  directly  to  the  close. 


79. 


C:    I       V 


The  triad  of  the  fourth  or  second  degree  often  precedes  the  Chord  of  the 
Sixth-and-Fourth . 


BO. 


C :    IV  I         V 


n 


I        V 


54  MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 

While  the  chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth  points  so  decisively  to  the  close, 
and  has  likewise  so  positive  an  influence  when  a  modulation  into  foreign 
keys  takes  place,  its  appearance  is  equally  flat  under  other  tircumstances,  so 
that  its  proper  use  is  dependent  upon  certain  conditions,  which  will  be 
discussed  hereafter. 


CHAPTER  IV. 
Seventh-Harmonies.    Chords  of  Four  Tones. 

SEVENTH-HARMONIES  are  based  upon  the  triads.    They  result  from  the 
addition  of  a  third  to  the  fifth  of  the  triad,  forming  a  seventh  from  the 

root: 

7  7 


Beside  the  different  kinds  of  triads,  the  different  kinds  of  sevenths  also 
will  produce  a  variety  of  Seventh-harmonies. 

General  Properties  of  Seventh-Chords. 

Seventh-chords  are  not  as  independent  as  most  of  the  triads,  but  point 
directly  to  one  progression,  so  that  they  never  alone,  but  only  in  connec- 
tion with  triads,  produce  any  effect  that  is  complete  or  exclusive.  On  the 
other  hand  they  render  the  relations  of  chords  to  one  another  closer,  more 
intimate,  and  by  this  property  become  particularly  useful  hi  combining 
chords  and  managing  the  parts. 

The  Dominant-Seventh-Chord  in  Major  and  Minor. 

The  most  prominent  of  the  Seventh-chords,  and  the  one  that  occurs  most 

frequently,  is  the 

DOMINANT-SEVENTH-CHORD. 

also  called  the  principal  Seventh-chord. 

Like  the  dominant  triad  it  is  based  upon  the  fifth  degree,  and  is  formed 
exactly  alike  in  major  and  minor,  namely  from  the  major  triad  and  minor 
teventh. 

82. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


In  the  fundamental  position  it  is  indicated  by  7  over  the  Bass  note  and  in 
our  method  of  indicating  by  V7 : 


C:    V7    G:    V7 

The  relation,  in  which  the  dominant  triad  stands  to  the  tonic  triad,  haa 
become  generally  clear  through  the  cadence  formation  above  exhibited  (see 
p.  33.)  The  close  receives  a  still  more  decided  character  by  the  use  of  the 
dominant-seventh  chord. 

The  following  chord-connection  will  show  the  form  of  cadence : 


84. 


Remark.  — It  should  be  observed  here,  that  the  triad  which  follows  the  seventh-chord  is 
incomplete;  in  both  cases  the  fifth  of  the  chord  is  wanting.  The  reason  of  thte  will 
appear  from  what  follows. 

The  inward  tendency  of  these  chords  to  some  point  of  rest,  and  their  con- 
sequent union  with  a  triad,  is  called 

RESOLUTION  OF  THE   SEVENTH-CHORD,   (Cadence.) 

When  the  union  of  the  Dominant  Seventh  chord  with  the  Tonic  triad 
takes  place  as  in  No.  84  and  similar  combinations,  it  is  called  a 
CLOSING  CADENCE. 

As  regards  the  movement  of  the  parts,  the  progression  of  the  intervals 
of  the  Seventh  chord  will  furnish  some  important  remarks. 

First,  we  regard  the  closing  cadence  as  the  regular  resolution  of  the 
Domin  ant-seventh-chord  especially. 

The  Seventh  as  the  essential  interval  of  the  chord  is,  from  its  relation  to 
the  root,  forced  to  a  determined  progression.  Eegarding  the  progression 
of  the  Bass,  which  contains  the  root,  as  given,  an  upward  progression  of 
the  Seventh  will  seem  impossible : 


85 


J 


a. 


56 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


even  if  a  third  part  be  added,  as  in  b  ;  whereas  its  movement  downward  ia 
fully  satisfactory : 


86. 


Since  the  progression  of  the  root  a  fourth  upwards  or  a  fifth  downwards 
is  already  determined,  that  of  the  Third  and  Fifth  of  the  Seventh-chord 
remains  to  be  considered. 

The  Third  of  the  Dominant- Seventh-chord  is  always  the  leading  tone  of  the 
Scale ;  its  natural  movement  is  determined  therefore  from  what  has  been 
said  heretofore  concerning  the  leading  tone  (p.  39 ;)  its  progression  is  to 
ascend  a  half  degree,  hence  b.  will  not  appear  as  natural  as  a. 


87. 


In  example  87  b.  the  Third  is  given  to  the  highest  part,  which  makes  the 
strangeness  of  its  progression  especially  palpable.  This  movement  can  be 
tolerated,  if  the  Third  lies  in  a  middle  part,  e.  g. 


88. 


This  descent  of  the  Third  (leading  tone)  is  therefore  to  be  employed 
under  the  following  conditions : 
a.      When  it  lies,  not  in  the  highest  part,  but  in  one  of  the  middle  partt, 


tddom  used. 


89. 


i 


MANUAL    OP   HARMONY. 
b.     When  the  Bass  progresses  by  contrary  motion,  e.  g. 

b.  not. 


90. 


& 7? \ & 3»J H- 


The  reason  for  the  second  rule  is  evident,  if  we  observe  the  concealed 
fifths  between  the  Alto  and  Bass  in  example  b. 

The  movement  of  the  Fifth  in  the  Seventh-chord  is  free.  While  it  for 
the  most  part  is  forced  by  the  Seventh  one  degree  downward,  yet  there  may 
be  reasons  for  allowing  it  also  to  move  a  step  upwards,  as  is  seen  in  example 
88  b.,  where  the  d  in  the  Soprano  is  carried  to  e. 

If  we  condense  the  substance  of  these  remarks,  we  obtain  the  following 
rules  for  the  regular  resolution  of  the  Seventh-chord,  and  for  the  cadence 
especially : 

/  The  Seventh  descends  a  diatonic  degree,  whilst 

\  The  root  moves  up  a  fourth  or  down  a  fifth  ; 

1  The  Third  is  carried  a  degree  upward,  contrary  to  the  seventh,  whilst 

I   The  Fifth  may  ascend  or  descend  one  degree. 

*^_  -^-  \ 

Remark.  —  With  this  progression  of  the  Third  contrary  to  the  Seventh  may  be  remembered 
what  was  said  before  (p.  38)  of  the  root  and  diminished  fifth  in  the  diminished  triad.  Both 
intervals  occur  again  in  the  Dominant- Seventh-chord. 


Application. 

Except  in  forming  cadences,  the  Dominant-Seventh-chord,  as  we  have 
thus  far  learned  to  apply  it,  is  seldom  used  in  the  middle  of  a  piece,  and  then 
only  in  such  places  as  do  not  create  a  sense  of  complete  termination. 

This  happens,  namely,  when  the  Seventh  of  the  chord  lies  in  the  upper 
part,  forming  an  imperfect  close,  or  when  the  Dominant-Seventh-chord  falls 
upon  the  accented  part  of  the  measure  (Thesis,)  since  in  a  perfect  close 
(cadence)  the  tonic  triad  must  fall  there  (see  p.  33.) 

Moreover  the  chord  often  appears  incomplete  by  the  omission  of  an 
interval.  This  interval,  however,  can  only  be  the  Fifth,  seldom  the  Third, 
since  the  omission  of  the  root  and  the  Seventh  would  entirely  alter  the  chord 
and  make  it  unrecognizable. 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 


e.    iddom :       d. 


/o        I     t* 


01.  /r 


m= 


V,      I  V7      I  

In  a.,  5.,  d.  the  Fifth  is  omitted,  in  c.  the  Third,  in  place  of  which  the  root 
is  in  all  cases  doubled,  restoring  the  closest  connection  with  the  following 
chord  by  sustaining  the  tone,  and  thus  allowing  the  tonic  triad  again  to 
appear  complete,  which  in  the  former  resolutions  was  not  the  case  (see 
No.  84.) 

Concerning  the  omission  of  one  interval  in  the  chord  we  annex  the 
following  remark : 

From  the  movement  of  the  parts  a  chord  may  appear  incomplete ;  the 
omitted  interval  will  generally  be  the  Fifth  of  the  fundamental  chord. 


Exercises. 

7  6647 


82.  ^{f-  

E 

&— 

pL  1_. 

—  (X  —  E  

&  pL  j  

2. 
___  — 

^j'tr 

3 

|           •  A^     ' 
6 

6          6 

7 
—6>  »  _jj 

Z  IP        6*     ....  1 

—  -i 

i—*     *!. 

t—  \  f-  "I 

^—J  «  1 

366 


I 


4- 


6  7 


6 
4    7 


m 


-& 


«        . 


14 


3: 


6. 


SE 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


59 


These  exercises  need  no  further  explanation.  It  has  been  formerly 
mentioned  that  by  7  the  Seventh-chord  in  the  position  thus  far  known  is 
indicated,  also  that  the  sharp  under  it,  or  in  general  any  chromatic  sign 
which  occurs  without  a  number  annexed,  has  reference  to  the  Third  from 
the  Bass  tone  (see  p.  55.) 


CHAPTER  V. 

Inversions  of  the  Seventh-Chord. 

As  the  form  of  the  triad  can  be  changed  by  the  Bass  taking  another 
interval  than  the  root,  this  can  take  place  likewise  with  Seventh-chords : 
2  he  first  inversion  results,  when  the  Bass  takes  the  Third  from  the  root; 
The  second,  when  the  Fifth  of  the  primitive  chord  lies  in  the  Bass,  and 
The  third,  when  the  original  Seventh  is  given  to  the  lowest  part. 
The  inversions  in  close  position  appear  thus : 


93,  Bi 


A  comparison  of  these  inversions  of  the  Seventh-chord  with  those  of  the 
triad  shows  clearly  their  analogous  positions : 


94. 


L 


1 


6 

3(3) 


sG  2) 


These  derived  chords  take  their  names  from  the  order  of  their  intervals : 

Theirs*  inversion  is  called:  the  Chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fifth, 

The  second:  the  Chord  of  the  Sixth-Fourth-and- Third — or  briefly  Fourth* 

and- Third, 

The  third:  the   Chord  of  the  Sixth- Fourth-and- Second — or  briefly  tin 

Chord  of  the  Second. 
Their  figuring  in  Thorough  Bass  may  be  seen  above  in  example  94. 


60 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


We  need  only  recall  the  fact  here,  that  with  these  inversions,  as  formerly 
with  those  of  the  triad,  the  only  essential  point  is  the  position  of  the  Bass  or 
lowest  part,  and  that  the  other  intervals  may  be  variously  distributed  among 
the  upper  parts,  e.  g. 

<5*2- 


05. 


^=*& 


.JSL. 


E|3 
— ^— T 


ri_j^».  ^  

-U.  

Application. 

2%e  regular  progression  (resolution)  of  these  derived  chords  is  hosed  upon 
that  of  the  primitive  chord. 

As  the  dissonance,  the  seventh,  established  the  progression  of  that  in  one 
direction,  so  also  with  the  derived  chords,  where  the  two  tones,  root  and 
seventh,  either  appear  again,  or  by  inversion  become  seconds,  the  tendency 
to  the  same  progression  will  exist. 


or: 


96. 


Progression  of  the  Chord  of  the  Sixtl\-and-Fifth. 

Since  the  original  Seventh  also  forms  a  dissonance,  a  diminished  ffth,  with 
the  Bass  tone  in  the  chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fifth,  whose  progression  has 
been  discussed  above  (p.  38,) 


97 


the  resolution  of  the  chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fifth  will  naturally  be  as 
follows : 

98. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY.  (ft 

The  progression  of  the  root  cannot  be  here  as  it  was  formerly  given,  aa 
the  G  of  the  upper  part  is  sustained  and  becomes  the  fifth  ;  this,  however, 
is  only  apparent,  for  the  same  progression  lies  at  the  foundation  of  this 
harmonic  connection,  as  is  shown  by  the  figuring  G7  C  in  example  98. 

Beside  other  causes,  the  chief  reason  why  the  Soprano  or  a  middle  part 
cannot  take  the  progression  of  the  fundamental  tones  note  for  note,  lies  in 
the  character  of  these  parts,  which  is  better  suited  for  the  connection  and 
union  of  harmonies,  than  for  their  foundation,  which  belongs  to  the  Bass. 

Remark.  —  Irregular  progressions  of  the  root  in  these  cases,  such  as  might  result  from  a 
freer  movement  of  the  parts  in  certain  relations,  are  not  hereby  excluded,  only  there  must 
be  an  inward  connection  and  relation  between  the  chords. 

Progression  of  the  Chord  of  the  Sixth-Fourth-and-Third. 

Beside  the  Seventh  and  its  inversion,  the  diminished  Fifth,  or  its  inver- 
sion the  augmented  Fourth,  again  appears  here  : 


99.  gi: 


The  resolution  of  this  chord  proceeds  as  follows  : 
a  6. 


,tfB«gi__^egi „_ 

100. 


G7    C  G7      C 

The  Bass,  the  original  Fifth,  can  move  in  both  these  ways. 

Progression  of  the  Chord  of  the  Second, 

This  chord  has  this  peculiarity,  that  the  original  dissonant  intervals,  the 
Seventh  and  the  diminished  Fifth,  can  only  occur  in  their  inversions,  aa 
Second  below  and  augmented  Fourth. 

The  progression  of  this  chord  is  the  following : 


101. 


The  resolution  of  the  Chord  of  the  Second  therefore  is  through  the  Chord 
of  the  Sixth. 

It  may  be  seen  from  these  resolutions,  that  they  are  all  based  upon  the 
natural  progression  of  the  Dominant-Seventh-Chord,  called  above  Cadence, 
for  throughout  we  find  the  root  indicated  Gj  C  or  V^  I. 


62 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


These  resolutions  therefore  will  of  themselves  form  Cadences,  only  not  of 
so  perfect  a  kind  as  those  before  mentioned,  and  as  those  are  called  perfect 
cadences,  so  these  are  distinguished  by  the  name  imperfect  cadences. 


View  of  the  Natural  Progression  of  all  the  Inversions  of  the 
Dominant-Seventh-Chord  in  Various  Positions. 


102. 


JOLL 


6 
-k- 


b.     The  Chord  of  the  Sixth-Fourth-and-Third 


! 


F^=& 
F-*--Hf 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 
C.     The  Chord  of  the  Second. 


262  62  6 


Exercises  for  Using  these  Chords. 

6 

66  32 


6 
4    7 


103. 


4  6 

36  65 


6          87 


32  63 


6  6 

5  4    7 


2          6 


436  687 





& 


I 


6. 


# 
2          6 


7. 


4 

3          6 


Ooservation.  —The  figures  8  7  in  the  last  measare  but  one  of  exercises  2,  4  and  5  meav 
that  the  Seventh  should  not  appear  at  once  with  the  chord,  but  follow  after  the  Octave. 


&4  MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 

CHAPTER  VI. 

Collateral  Seventh-Harmonies. 

WHILST  with  the  triads  three  principal  chords  are  necessary,  in  order  to 
establish  the  key  (the  relation  to  the  tonic  triad  being  the  central  point,) 
with  Seventh-chords  only  one  principal  chord  is  needed,  the  Dominant- 
Seventh  Chord,  the  contents  alone  of  which  make  the  key  unmistakeable, 
and  whose  natural  progression  to  the  tonic  triad  represents  it. 

Remark.  —  In  view  of  the  fact  that  the  Seventh  of  the  Dominant-chord  is  at  the  same 
time  the  root  of  the  Subdominant  triad,  the  relations  of  the  two  tones  g  and /(as  roots  of 
the  dominant  triads)  to  their  common  centre  c  (as  tonic  triad)  becomes  perfectly  clear  (see 
above  p.  22.  3.) 

Beside  this  Dominant-Seventh-chord,  also  called  Principal  or  Fundamental 
Seventh-chord,  Seventh-harmonies  can  be  formed  from  the  other  triads  in 
major  and  minor,  whose  relation  to  a  fixed  key,  to  be  sure,  is  undeniable,  but 
by  no  means  so  decided  as  with  the  former.  They  are  termed : 

COLLATERAL  SEVENTH-CHORDS. 

They  are  simply  to  be  formed  by  adding  to  the  triads  a  Seventh  of  the 

root. 

a.    In  Major  : 

:fc 
104. 


^y  yj GS  •  • 

^      %  % — I — H 

% — % — *      "  \\ 


IV,  VI,        VII  °7 


6.    In  Minor : 

NB.  NB. 


We  arrive  here  at  the  chord  formations,  which  without  connection  with 
dther  chords  sound  more  or  less  hard  and  therefore  strange,  because,  as  was 
4aid  before,  their  relation  to  a  fundamental  key  is  not  as  decided  and  clear 
as  that  of  the  Dominant- Seventh- Chord.  Their  use  therefore  is  somewhat 
less  frequent,  but  none  the  less  adapted  for  giving  variety  and  especial 
coloring  to  harmonic  progressions. 

Amongst  these  collateral  chords,  the  following  kinds  may  be  distin- 
guished • 


a.     Major  triads  with  major 
seventh. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY.  65 

in  Major..          ,,,     in  Minor. 


105.    fc=g 


a;  VI 


NB.     Mi/or  Jn'acfc  «?#/i  minor  seventh  always  form  dominant  chords  of 

the  seventh. 

in  Minor. 
b.     Minor  triad  with 


major  seventh. 


^^  not  used  as  fundamental  harmony. 


a:    i 


C.     Minor  triads  with  minor 
seventh. 


in  Major  : 


in  Mino*  ; 


C:  n7 

d.     Diminished  triads  with  a  minor 
seventh. 


r       vi7  a;  iv7 

in  Major  :         in  Minor  ; 
-«- 


C:  vn°7        a; 

in  Minor ; 


.     Diminished  triad  with  a  diminished  seventh. 


f.      The  augmented  triad  with  a  major  seventh, 


as  it  is  found  on  the  third  degree  in  minor,  is  indeed  not  impracticable,  but 

for  reasons  before  discovered  under  the  augmented  triad,  rare  and  ambiguous 

Remark.  —  We  shall  find  this  chord  again  in  the  tenth  chapter  with  a  different  basis. 

Use  of  the  Collateral  Seventh-Chords  in  Major. 

The  Seventh,  or  its  inversion,  the  Second,  whether  major,  minor,  dimin- 
ished or  augmented  (the  last  applying  to  the  Second  only,)  will  always  in  its 
relation  to  the  root  as  dissonance  incline  to  a  progression. 

This  natural  progression  with  the  collateral  Seventh-chords  is  none  other 
than  that  already  found  with  the  Dominant- Seventh,  namely  one  degree 
downwards  towards  the  root,  if  the  latter  descends  a  fifth  or  ascends  a 
fourth. 

Accordingly  while  the  progression  of  the  principal  intervals  of  the  chord 
is  found  to  be  the  folio  whig : 


106 


sqz zz 


66 


MANUAL    OF    HARMONY. 


no  new  rules  are  needed  for  the  other  intervals ;  the  Third  will  ascend  one 
degree,  while  the  Fifth  can  progress  in  either  direction. 

6.  c. 


107. 


m 


Remark. — The  exceptional  progression  of  the  Third  in  example  107  b.  arose  from  thii, 
that  the  concealed  Octave,  which  would  result  from  the  regular  ascent  of  the  Third  by  OM 
degree,  e.  g. 


108. 


1  J^            f2  '          ^J  

e*—  = 
^ 

~\\ 

Ffr  —  &i^**-  — 

O, 

<£ 

~\\ 

was  thus  avoided.    See  p.  35,  example  32. 

But  whether,  through  the  movement  of  the  fifth,  the  leading  tone  in  the  following  chord 
shall  be  doubled,  as  in  example  107  c.,  or  the  following  concealed  fifths  are  to  be  preferred : 


1 


109. 


will  depend  upon  circumstances,  to  be  judged  upon  in  practice  with  reference  to  place  and 
position. 

Natural  Progression  (in  Cadence-form)  of  the  Collateral  Seventh- 
Chords  in  Major. 

a.    of  the  first  degree. 


or : 


not: 


110. 


.•  not  ,• 


^*&  o  


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 

with  omission  of  the  fifth: 


67 


SH^i 

—  g  — 

j             1     <fe 

1   &            & 

L^-4 

5? 
& 

m 


6.    o/  £fo  second  degree. 


-—%=- 


or; 


C:    n 


without  fifth: 


not: 


not: 


not: 


c.    of  the  third  degree: 


not:  fiotf; 

C:    in?        vi 

d.    of  the  fourth  degree  (seldom  with  this  resolution.  ) 


^iS2Z=J± ± =d± — ^5±s:s 


— &- 


vn 


without  fifth; 


68  MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 

e.     of  the  sixth  degree. 


without  fifth  : 


CS-—T (T^^TT ~lT-ex      I      '        -|T~°'^Z 


not; 
G:  vn°7      in 

without  fifth : 


-&- 


Remark.  —  The  progressions  here  given  of  all  the  Seventh-chords  are  neither  exhaustive 
hi  their  positions,  nor  have  they  been  presented  as  including  all  that/are  possible. 

The  difficulty  in  forming  such  progressions  lies  only  in  the  frequent  occurrence  of  con- 
cealed fifths  and  octaves.  So  all  the  remarks  above  annexed,  as  "  not,"  "  not  good,"  which 
refer  mostly  to  the  movement  of  the  Bass,  so  far  as  it  produces  those  faults  in  connection 
with  other  necessary  part-movements,  are  in  many  cases  to  be  taken  only  from  the  theoretical 
standpoint,  whereas  in  practice,  even  in  the  so-called  pure  composition,  such  and  similar 
cases  must  often  be  judged  according  to  the  principles  above  stated  (on  pp.  52  and  53.^ 

As  theory  hitherto  has  not  succeeded  in  establishing  positive  rules  for  all  cases  of  the 
kind,  the  true  and  the  false,  the  admissible  and  inadmissible  in  this  respect  can  only  be 
discerned  by  a  thorough  harmonic  culture  and  a  true  musically  formed  ear.  More  on  this 
•abject  will  follow  later. 

Of  the  Peculiar  Progression  of  the  Seventh-chord  of  the 
Seventh  Degree. 

In  the  above  table,  under  110,  of  the  progression  of  all  the  Seventh- 
chords  in  major,  that  of  the  seventh  degree,  similarly  to  the  others,  was 
carried  to  the  third  degree,  i.  e.  the  progression  of  the  root,  as  with  the  other 
Beventh-chords,  was  to  ascend  a  fourth,  or  descend  a  fifth.  This  progression 
U  the  less  frequent,  and  is  for  the  most  part  used  only  where  there  is  a 


MANUAL    OF    HARMONY. 


69 


uniform  movement  of  the  harmony  (sequence.)  That  one  occurs  oftener,  OB 
which  the  diminished  triad,  to  which  the  Seventh  is  here  added,  is  based  (see 
pp.  38  and  50),  namely  to  the  tonic  triad. 


Hi. 


C:    vu 


That  the  relation  of  the  diminished  triad  to  the  tonic  triad  is  not  changed 
by  the  addition  of  the  seventh,  on  the  contrary  is  still  more  positive,  ia 
plainly  seen  by  the  above  example. 

It  is  to  be  observed  also,  that  when  the  chord  appears  in  the  above 
position,  the  Third  of  the  following  triad  must  be  doubled  (see  1115.,)  aa 
otherwise  perfect  fifths  would  result  (see  112  a.)  ; 


112. 


or  a  skip  must  be  made  as  in  &.,  a  movement  of  the  Tenor  which  not  infre- 
quently occurs,  and  which  is  very  effective  notwithstanding  the  concealed 
octave. 

It  is  a  peculiarity  of  this  chord,  that  its  only  satisfactory  position  is  that 
hi  which  the  Seventh  lies  in  the  highest  part,  whilst  the  other  positions,  if  not 
impracticable,  are  yet  more  confused. 


"          ' 


Iffin 


2. 

z 

I  V. 

113. 


Remark.  — Whether  the  reason  of  this  lies  in  the  fact,  that  the  Seventh,  with  the  pro- 
gression as  above,  has  the  character  of  the  Ninth  (as  many  theorists  affirm  that  this  chord 
with  its  resolution  is  based  upon  the  Dominant-Seventh-chord  with  a  Ninth  added,)  which, 
although  resembling  that  of  the  Seventh,  is  yet  more  comprehensive,  and  does  not  admit 
of  a  middle  position,  cannot  here  be  further  investigated 


70  MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


The  Freer  Treatment  of  the  Third  and  Fifth  in  the  Seventh- 
Chord. 

Different  progressions  of  these  intervals  have  already  been  used  in  the 
above  chord-connections.  The  Fifth  moves  in  either  direction,  the  Third 
likewise  at  times  a  degree  upwards,  at  others  three  degrees  downwards.  This 
was  generally  hi  view  of  avoiding  concealed  fifths  and  octaves.  Apart  from 
these  faulty  progressions  the  Third  especially  may  move  differently  still, 
whence  the  part-movement  often  becomes  freer  and  more  independent,  e.  g. 

a.  I.  not  good:       c. 


114. 


i 


It  is  seen  hi  c.  that  this  progression  is  possible  in  the  middle  parts  also,  if 
the  position  admits  of  it. 

The  progression  of  the  Soprano  in  b.  is  not  good,  because  a  skip  of  an 
augmented  fourth  is  produced  by  it. 

The  step  from  the  fourth  to  the  seventh  degree  is  called  the  Tritone, 
because  it  contains  three  whole  tones.  Upon  this  more  in  the  sequel. 

Other  progressions  of  the  fifth  are  only  possible,  when  the  Bass  also 
changes  its  usual  progression  as  fundamental  tone,  as  in  general  still  further 
progressions  of  the  parts  will  result,  when  we  seek  for  other  chord-<joimec- 
tions  than  those  hitherto  employed. 


The  Preparation  of  the  Seventh. 

We  have  thus  far  spoken  of  the  progression  of  the  Seventh-chords,  but 
not  of  their  introduction. 

The  harshness  of  the  entrance  of  many  dissonances  and  especially  of  most 
of  the  Sevenths  in  the  collateral  Seventh-chords  renders  a  careful  introduction 
of  them  necessary,  which  consists  in  their  "being  prepared. 

A  tone  is  prepared,  when  it  already  exists  in  the  preceding  chord  IN  ONE 
AND  THE  SAME  TOICE  as  a  harmonic  tone,  so  that  it  can  be  competed  by  a 
tie. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


71 


Such  a  preparation  of  a  tone  we  had  previously  in  the  first  chord-connec- 
tions presented,  e.  g. 


-« — — Ss- 


s 


115. 


We  may  say  here :  that  the  c  of  the  Soprano  in  the  second  chord  is 
prepared  by  the  c  of  the  first  chord ;  also  the  g  of  the  Alto  in  the  example 
that  follows. 

But  the  necessity  of  the  preparation  of  Sevenths  lies  not  only  in  the 
harshness  of  their  effect  when  they  are  heard  without  preparation,  but 
specially  in  the  character  of  the  harmonic  connection  and  union  of  two 
successive  chords,  which  is  eminently  peculiar  to  sevenths,  and  would  not 
appear  without  that  preparation. 

The  preparation  of  the  Seventh  can  be  effected  as  follows : 


116. 


C:  V     I.  IV    V     I^IV    IV 


C:  in    IVjvn 


in    vi 


I         vi7  ii  IV      vn  °7  I 


In  all  these  examples  the  tone,  which  is  connected  by  a  tie  with  the  same 
tone  following,  forms  the  preparation  of  the  Seventh. 

In  forming  such  a  preparation  the  following  rules  are  to  be  observed  : 

a.  The  preparation  falls  upon  the  unaccented  part  of  the  measure  (Arsis) 
and  must 

b.  At  least  be  of  equal  length  with  the  following  Seventh  :    it  may  I  w 
longer,  but  not  shorter,  e.  g. 


n 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


not: 


-^ 

.   .. 

.  r        ....  u- 

117 


Remark. —  The  preparation  of  the  Seventh  forms  one  of  the  most  important  parto  of  the 
harmonic  system,  and  is  to  be  managed  and  practised  with  great  care,  because  upon  it 
depends  the  most  essential  feature  of  the  inner,  closest  harmonic  connection. 

Although  exceptions  on  this  point  also  may  be  found  in  practice^yet  it  may  repeatedly  be 
called  to  mind,  that  they  are  nothing  else  than  exceptions,  which  cannot  disprove  the  im- 
portance of  the  principle  of  harmonic  union,  but  can  only  be  judged  as  a  concrete  case, 
caused  and  intended  by  reason  of  its  position  and  relations.  (Page  44.  Remark.) 

These  exceptions  occur  mostly  with  minor  Sevenths,  as  the  less  harsh,  like  that  of  the 
second  and  seventh  degree,  and  are  always  tempered  by  a  good  progression. 

But  the  Seventh  of  the  Dominant- Chord,  also  called  the  Fundamental 
Seventh,  forms  a  special  exception  to  the  necessary  preparation.  It  is  that 
whose  effect,  by  its  relation  to  the  tonic  triad,  to  the  fundamental  key,  is  the 
least  harsh  and  strange,  and  does  not  need  preparation  in  all  cases. 

The  following  may  be  observed  as  to  its  farther  use : 

The  Dominant- Seventh  needs,  to  be  sure,  no  preparation,  but  its  free 
entrance  requires  the  presence  of  the  roott  if  the  progression  is  to  be  pure  and 
without  harshness. 


118. 


Remark.  —  The  so-called  passing  Sevenths,  which  naturally  as  such  cannot  be  prepared 
are  regulated  according  to  the  rules  for  passing  notes,  which  are  explained  afterwards. 
Concerning  passing  sevenths,  see  Chap.  18. 

The  Seventh  of  the  Seventh  degree,  also,  in  major  and  minor  (in  the 
latter  case  the  diminished  Seventh-chord)  on  account  of  its  peculiar  char* 
acter  by  no  means  requires  preparation  in  all  cases. 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 


78 


1-      3                       T 

Exercises. 

7                    66 

•4, 

/^v  .     .                       ^y 

j<7     1                        i 

^    i 

"1./V  ZJ           !             I      .Kt           (_ 

^    i      /^?   nd 

Z3&3Z 

.     u    &  .  ^ 

i      <5» 

267 


The  Connection  of  Seventh-Gliords  with  each  other. 

The  progression  or  resolution  of  the  Seventh-chords  in  the  previous 
examples  was  always  through  the  triad  of  the  fourth  degree  above,  or,  which 
is  the  came  thing,  of  the  fifth  degree  below.  Instead  of  the  triad,  a  Seventh- 
chord  also  of  the  same  degree  may  follow. 

The  progression  of  the  parts  undergoes  no  change  by  this,  only  the  Third 
of  the  first  Seventh-chord  will  in  this  case  serve  for  the  preparation  of  the 
following  Seventh,  therefore  not  move,  but  be  sustained,  e.  g. 


120. 


C:  ii 


Here  the  Third  of  the  dominant-chord,  J,  forms  the  preparation  of  the 
following  Seventh. 

The  peculiarity  of  this  harmonic  connection  is,  that  in  one  of  the  Seventh* 
chords  the  Fifth  will  always  be  wanting.  In  example  120  the  fifth  of  the 
first  chord  was  omitted.  When  several  Seventh-chords  follow  each  other, 
theffth  will  be  wanting'  in  each  alternate  chord. 


74 


MANUAL    OF    HARMONY. 


121. 


The  following  rule  may  serve  for  harmonic  connections  of  this  sort : 
When  two  or  more  Seventh-chords  IN  THE  FUNDAMENTAL  POSITION  succeed 
each  other,  the  fifth  is  omitted  in  the  alternate  chords. 


Exercises. 


4 

3       6 


6 

6      5 


122.    ^p  ^ 

.  —  ^  —  &  —  i  — 

—  T  —  1  a  — 

9- 

2-      3          67          7 

sSte^tess 

6           J        2 

-p—  i  —  1  —  4- 

^S  —  ^— 

6                    7         7 

-—  i  —  53  — 

: 
J  It 

3-         5           777 

A^-^-f  +-H-f- 

J—  «—  J- 

4 

X  _J  

:-^-^-* 

6          26 

.^±^4^±. 

i  ^ 

7       7 

-     .     I"  Tf 

Z  fflp      "  e)  ^ 
4                       T 

&d           5~»- 
i  ^      »— 

6 
65                   7 

•  -f—&-\-&—3- 

-UJ  1-—?  1 

-^7      4^ 

-*-^-^-|| 

t-t--yfa    ig  •  —  "     •!•  1     •     \ 

=*wi  —  w-H-ir* 

-^1  —  ^tt 

Use  of  the  Collateral  Seventh-Chords  in  Minor. 

The  use  of  collateral  Seventh-chords  in  minor  is  more  limited.  Many 
of  them  for  Chord-connections,  as  used  in  major,  prove  unsuited,  or  indefi- 
nite and  ambiguous ;  others  in  their  cadence-progression  result  in  difficult 
and  unmelodious  intervals  in  the  parts. 

One  form  of  Seventh-chord,  as  given  by  the  first  degree,  produces  no 
progression  analogous  to  the  above,  since  the  following  combination  is 
inconceivable. 


123. 


"  r— '          "I Gel  3^J       •-•— 1-« 


IT 


MANUAL    Of   HARMONY. 


75 


Remark.  —  Although  progressions  can  be  formed  with  the  above  combination  of  intervals. 
aa  thus : 


124. 


i 


yet  it  would  be  difficult  to  prove  that  this  was  a  progression  of  the  Seventh-ohord  of  th« 
first  degree  in  minor. 

The  resolution  of  the  chord  of  the  Second  degree  is  to  the  dominant,  and 
is  very  frequently  used : 


JV—J&. 


125. 


:    n°     V 


not: 


not; 


A  progression  of  the  Seventh-chord  of  the  third  degree  is  not  impossible; 


126. 


it  is.  however,  ambiguous,  and  might  be  met  with  in  0  major  oftener  than  in 
A  minor.  (See:  Altered  Chords.) 

It  may  here  be  observed  that  the  fifth  in  this  chord,  as  an  augmented 
interval,  will  always  ascend  one  degree. 

The  chords  of  the  fourth  and  sixth  degrees  are  uncommon,  as  the  progrea- 
iion  of  the  parts  in  the  resolution  is  awkward  and  unmelodious. 


-g- 


good; 


127. 


a:    iv7  vn 


76 


MANUAL    OF   HARMON'S. 


-6L. 


p 


=f= 


&  — 

&  

1  —  =*— 

—  —  *-ff 

128. 


The  forced  effect  of  most  of  the  above  progressions  is  undeniable,  and 
makes  them  of  little  use.  — 

The  seventh  degree  in  minor  furnishes  an  important  chord,  which  is  gen- 
erally known  by  the  name  of  the 

DIMINISHED   SEVENTH-CHORD. 

A  resolution  of  this  chord  like  that  of  all  the  others  is  impossible,  as  it 
would  lead  to  the  triad  of  the  third  degree,  which  was  found  above  to  be 
doubtful  and  ambiguous. 

Instead  of  this,  its  progression,  as  with  the  Seventh-chord  of  the  seventh 
degree  in  major  (see  p.  68,)  is  based  upon  the  natural  movement  of  the 
leading-tone,  upon  which  this  chord  rests : 


129. 


'$ — 


c:  vn 


As  the  root  of  this  chord  (leading-tone)  moves  a  half  degree,  so  also  the 
Seventh  descends  a  half  degree,  while  the  Third  and  Fifth  move  with  the 
same  regularity  as  with  other  seventh-chords ;  but  the  progression  of  the 
Third  in  many  positions  (130  a.)  is  to  be  carefully  observed,  because  it 
easily  leads  to  a  faulty  progression : 


not: 


130. 


whereas  the  position  of  the  Third  in  b.  and  c.  gives  more  freedom. 

Remark.  —  The  natural  progression  of  this  chord,  as  of  the  Seventh-chord  of  the  seventh 
degree  in  major,  to  the  tonic  triad,  has  induced  the  older  harmonists  to  trace  its  foundation 
to  the  harmony  of  the  Dominant-Seventh.  They  considered  a  ninth  (major  or  minor)  to  be 
added  to  this  chord  and  the  root  omitted,  whence  resulted  both  chords  of  the  seventh 
degree. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


77 


In  referring  to  what  is  said  later  in  Chap.  9th  concerning  the  chord  of  the  Ninth,  w« 
would  state  here  as  the  ground  of  our  views,  that  that  assumption  as  regards  Ninth-chords 
is  needless  and  far-fetched,  and  that  the  simplicity  of  the  harmonic  system  for  practical 
purposes  would  be  preferable  to  any  complicated  theory. 

As  to  the  use  of  the  diminished  Seventh-chord,  the  following  also  should 
be  observed: 

The  diminished  Seventh,  the  smoothest  of  all,  needs  no  preparation  (see 
p.  72.) 

Exercises. 


131. 


These,  and  all  former  exercises  in  this  chapter,  whose  object  naturally  was 
only  to  learn  the  mechanical  use  of  the  chords  explained  hitherto,  and  test 
the  established  rules  and  remarks,  for  this  very  reason  are  in  their  structure 
somewhat  stiff  and  unwieldy,  since  the  great  number  of  seventh-chords 
could  appear  here  only  in  the  fundamental  position,  and  because  the  intro- 
duction of  many  of  them  from  our  present  standpoint,  which  did  not  allow 
us  the  choice  of  other  means,  was  difficult  and  could  not  but  seem  forced. 

The  following  may  yet  serve  for  their  illustration : 

The  root  of  these  Seventh-chords  moves  throughout  a  fourth  or  fifth  as  in 
cadences,  as  may  be  seen  from  the  Bass  part,  only  in  the  third  exercise  of 
122  and  131  there  appears  to  be  an  exception.  In  the  fourth  measure  of 
the  third  exercise  in  122  the  Bass  tone  remains  stationary,  but  the  progres- 
sion of  the  root  is  still  contained  in  both  chords  according  to  rule:  07~.Z)7. 
The  sustaining  of  the  Bass  tone  was  possible  here,  because  we  have  already 
become  acquainted  with,  and  may  therefore  use,  the  modifications t  of  tht 
Dominant- Seventh-chord.  The  case  is  the  same  in  tfae  fifth  bar  of  the  third 


78 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


example  of  131,  where  the  progression  of  the  root  takes  place  A7-d  with  a 
sustained  Bass. 

In  the  second  exercise  of  131  the  Seventh-chord  of  the  third  degree  in 
minor  is  used,  and  it  may  be  admitted  that  with  this  introduction  it  will  not 
seem  unnatural  and  harsh. 


CHAPTER  VII 

Inversions  of  the  Collateral  Seventh-Chords. 

By  the  inversion  of  the  collateral  Seventh-chords  are  produced  the  same 
derived  chords,  which  have  already  appeared  with  the  dominant-seventh, 
namely:  the  Chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fifth,  of  the  Sixth-Fourth-and- Third 
and  of  the  Second. 

The  varieties  of  Thirds,  Fifths  and  Sevenths  in  the  fundamental  harmony 
effect  no  alteration  in  the  treatment  of  the  inversions.  For  although  the 
major  Seventh  becomes  by  inversion  a  minor  Second,  the  diminished  an 
augmented  (see  pp.  18, 19,)  yet  their  progression  follows  in  the  same  manner 
described  above. 


132. 


m 


i 


No  new  rules  are  needed  for  the  progression  of  any  of  these  Seventh- 
chords.  That  of  the  Seventh  degree  alone  in  major  and  minor  requires  some 
care,  as  has  been  already  remarked,  on  account  of  the  easily  occurring  open 
fifths. 

Something  may  here  be  added  concerning  their  treatment. 

Progression  of  the  Seventh-chord  of  the  Seventh  degree  in  major. 


133. 


All  these  transpositions  of  the  chord  are  available,  though  the  last,  the 
chord  of  the  Second,  finds  its  degree  with  most  difficulty,  since  the  resohv 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


79 


tion  into  the  chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth  could  seldom  take  place,  and  at 
best  as  a  passing  chord. 

We  must  not  be  deceived  by  the  compact  form,  in  which  these  chords  are 
exhibited  in  133,  as  to  their  utility ;  as  was  mentioned  above,  it  only  depends 
here  upon  the  Seventh  lying  above  or  below  the  root,  and  positions  of  the 
Chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fifth  and  of  the  Sixth-Fourth-and-Third  like  the 
following : 


134. 


seem  consequently  more  satisfactory,  because  the  Seventh  lies  above  the  root. 
The  diminished  Seventh-chord  requires  a  method  of  progression  like  the 
above,  e.  g. 


135. 


Here  also  the  third  inversion,  the  chord  of  the  Second,  will  prove  the 
least  practicable,  as  is  shown  by  the  unsatisfying  resolution  into  the  Sixth- 
and-Fourth,  a  chord  that  always  requires  careful  treatment,  of  which  what 
is  necessary  will  be  said  hereafter. 

.  That  consecutive  fifths,  which  result  from  the  resolution  of  the  chord  of 
the  Sixth-and-Fifth  and  of  the  Sixth-Fourth-and-Third  hi  this  manner : 


136. 


are  to  be  considered  faulty,  has  been  already  mentioned  (p.  76.)     As  to 
consecutive  fifths  of  this  sort  compare  also  p.  29,  No.  16,  17  and  18. 

With  this  very  manageable  chord  the  position  of  the  root  relatively  to 
the  Seventh  makes  no  such  essential  difference,  as  is  the  case  with  the  chord 
of  the  seventh  degree  in  major ;  the  seventh  may  lie  above  or  below  the  root, 
the  similarity  of  sound  between  the  augmented  second  and  the  minor  third 
always  adding  softness  to  the  chord,  and  causing  the  former  to  be  felt  as 
«uch  only  in  relation  to  the  key. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


Exercises. 


e       e 


l 

6          5 


137. 


II 


3      '    1  3 


I 


66  6 

25  65  2         6 2          6         5 

|  I      1 ^J^^^-j* *^^**' 


6  4 

5  5  2673  66 


6 
6        5 


7         7 


66 
326264265 


7          7 


7. 


67736 


8.  3 


6  7367 

?— ijiTrl l~ra:=|: 


9. 


7  6 

36  7          it          S 


ft 


___ 


10- 


5        6        73  2          6 


6         4 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


CHAPTER 

Seventh-Chords  in  connection  with  Chords  of  various  De- 
grees, other  than  those  before  Used.    False  Cadences. 

THE  familiar  rule,  that  the  Seventh  must  in  the  resolution  descend  one 
degree,  is  indeed  completely  confirmed  in  the  chord-connections  previously 
shown ;  it  has,  however,  as  little  positive  authority  as  other  matters,  which 
under  different  conditions  and  relations,  in  the  great  variety  of  chord-con- 
nections, are  subjected  to  necessary  alterations  and  deviations. 

With  the  movement  of  the  Seventh,  or  its  inversion,  the  Second,  all 
depends  on  the  progression  of  the  root.  If  this,  as  in  all  cases  presented 
thus  far,  is  such  that  without  the  descent  of  the  seventh  no  intelligible  and 
satisfactory  result  would  follow,  then  that  rule  would  possess  full  authority. 

The  progression  of  the  root,  however,  may  entirely  annul  this  tendency 
of  the  Seventh ;  it  may  either  remain  stationary  or  even  ascend,  e.  g. 


138.  i^gg^Ef^f---- ; 


This  leads  us  to  the  possibility  of  connecting  Seventh-chords  with  chords 
of  other  degrees  than  those  hitherto  employed.  We  may  adduce  here  a  few 
familiar  kinds  of  chord-connections  with  remarks,  that  in  trying  new  forma- 
tions of  this  sort  we  may  be  able  to  proceed  on  critical  principles. 

We  begin  with  the  Dominant-Seventh-chord. 

It  has  been  said  before  that  the  resolution  of  seventh-chords  as  shown 
thus  far  is  called  cadence,  and  that  of  the  Dominant-Seventh-chord,  closing 
cadence. 

When  any  chord  but  the  tonic  triad,  which  forms  the  closing  cadence, 
follows  the  Dominant-Seventh-chord,  the  natural  tendency  towards  the  close      V 
*<»  either  delayed  or  else  wholly  removed.     The  anticipation  of  the  natural 
result  experiences  hereby  a  disappointment,  hence  these  combinations  are 
called 

FALSE  CADENCES. 

In  general,  therefore,  false  cadences  arise,  where  the  progression  of  the 
Dominant-Seventh-chord  leads,  not  to  the  tonic  triad,  but  to  different  chords. 


MANUAL    OF    HARMONY. 


A  few  instances  we  shall  now  explain. 

1.   The  connection  of  the  Dominant- Seventh-chord  with  triads  other  than 
that  of  the  tonic,  where  the  Seventh  descends  one  degree. 
a.    Connection  with  the  Sixth  degree : 

in  Major:  in  Minor: 

n 

139. 


C  :    V7    vi 


This  combination  (false  cadence)  occurs  very  frequently. 
The  effect  of  this  progression  with  the  inversions  of  the  Seventh-chord  is 
not  as  decided,  and  therefore  more  rare : 


in  Major: 

6 
56 


4 
3 


in  Minor; 
6 
5         6 


140. 


C:    V7        vi  

b.     Connection  with  the  third  degree : 


a:    V7     VI 


141. 


better  position. 


C: 


in 


Remark. — Trials  with  the  inversions  of  the  chord  are  omitted  here  and  in  the  sequel; 
they  are  easily  made. 

This  progression  is  more  decided  when  modulation  is  employed : 

7  6  1.         6  76 

142. 


In  minor  also  the  connection  with  the  triad  of  the  third  degree  is  possible, 
only  the  latter  as  a  dissonant  chord  (through  the  augmented  fifth)  requires 
that  something  follow. 


7          6 

#    - 


143. 


a:  V       HI'       VI 


i.  Connection  with  triads  with  the  Seventh  sustained. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 
a,      With  tjie  sicond  degree : 


not:  useless  in  Minor. 

6 


144.    3t=*Z±4 


— *?==zz=r 


-  — 


C:    V7      ii  

b.      With  the  fourth  degree : 


in  Major. 


-7S- 
<K      V7         11° 


in  Minor. 


145. 


The  connection  of  the  Dominant  chord  with  Seventh-harmonies  of 
other  degrees,  than  those  we  have  used,  is  also  possible.  A  few  of  them 
here  follow : 


6th  Degree:          3d  Degree: 


or; 


Minor: 


3d  Deyret. 


146. 


-27-    -zr 
C:    V,      vi7 


ni 


far 


V7  aV7 


a:  V 


VI 


7          1JLX7  V7    U.      Y7  U.       Viy 

When  we  modulate  into  other  keys,  the  possibility  of  new  combination* 
is  greatly  increased,  e.  g. 

a.  With  descending  Seventh : 

not:  better: 

U7'     S— 

!:     V7rf:V7 

b.  With  sustained  Seventh : 


C:  V7  b:  vn°7  a:  V7  F:  V7  a:  V7  G:  vii0 


143. 


:V7Eb:V7     C:V7Bb:V7    a:  V7    C:V7      a:  V7    G :  %~^ 


3.   Connection  of  chords  with  the  Seventh  ascending. 
This  case  may  occur  in  the  ordinary  cadence  (V7~I)  as  well  as  with  othflt 
progressions  of  the  Seventh-chord,  (e.  g.  H7-  V.) 
a.     By  exchanging  the  progression  with  various  parts. 


84 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


149. 


The  movement  of  a  third  in  the  Bass  renders  the  descent  of  the  Seventh 
impossible,  as  the  concealed  octave  caused  thereby 


150. 


is  entirely  erroneous. 

This  progression  of  the  root  is  not  to  be  used  in  the  other  parts. 


151. 


All  these  instances  are  faulty. 

b.     By  sustaining  the  fundamental  tone: 


not: 


152. 


g> «g- 


C:    I      V7    I 


The  root  (G)  serves  here  as  the  so-called  sustained  part.  (See  later. 
Organ  point)  But  it  must  be  remote  from  the  Seventh,  and  the  following 
progression  would  be  wrong : 


153. 


^^g—^-pp 
I^^^^Btt 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 
C.     By  a  chiomatic  change,  and  modulation : 


W4 


C:  V7  G:  V7 


V,  e:  vn°7    C:  V7  F#:  V7 


d.     By  contrary  motion  of  the  Bass  in  modulating  into  other  keys  : 

ja „ o-^dza .„. „. — ,g»  «•••  ^z. 


C:  V7  by.  vn°7  a:  V7  d:  vn°7     C:  V7  F:  V7 

(See  above,  No.  149.) 

The  foregoing  table  of  chord-connections  gives  only  an  indication  of 
possible  combinations.  Its  object  was  to  call  attention  to  the  variety  of 
harmonic  progression. 

Of  the  value  of  these  and  similar  combinations  criticism  can  decide  only 
in  special  cases,  since  their  proper  use  becomes  possible  only  by  considering 
their  introduction,  their  progression,  their  rhythmical  importance,  and,  in  britjf, 
their  whole  situation. 

The  particular  character  of  a  piece,  the  part-movement  expressly  formed 
with  reference  to  the  motive  or  idea  employed,  and  similar  causes,  may  lead 
to  such  harmonic  connections;  but  to  use  them  adventurously,  for  the 
production  of  new  and  strange  formations,  in  general  for  the  sake  of 
appearing  original,  might  in  few  cases  so  succeed  that  the  object  would  not 
be  perceptible : 

Exercises. 


150. 


1 


86 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


2         6  73 

a- 


4  7 


S         5 


A  66 

*•       fc         6          5          5 


6       5 


6          6 


7       7 


open  position.  3        667 


6 

6         5 


6 
47 


-&- 


G. 


Ji 


46  6 

33425 


6       6 


6          64 

5          4366 


-g>~ «g 


7 


6         6 

5          5 


Remark.  —  The  open  position  in  the  5th  exercise  has  reference  to  a  part-movement 
cited  on  p.  84 ;  it  can  afterwards  be  abandoned. 

The  Collateral  Seventh-Harn\onies  connected  with  Chords 
of  other  Degrees  or  Keys. 

A  few  chord-connections  with  collateral  Sevenths  may  follow  here.     To 
cite  all  cases  of  the  kind  would  be  both  impossible  and  inexpedient. 
a.      With  regular  progression  of  the  Seventh. 

* 


157. 


n7  ev  V7    C :  in7      IV       m7  F:  V7  C: 


not; 


better: 


a:n°7    in'      VI  iv,      V  iv7      V 

b.      With  free  progression  of  the  Seventh. 


&c. 
G:  V7a:vii°7d-vn°7 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 


87 


not: 


158. 


jj  mg^  & ITf -g  jrr-  £7  IT"          .  n  ^F-»  /6          "]T  —    i  ^?  fT 


C:n7G:V7        C:ii7c.*vn7       C:ii7    a:V7        C:  n7      d:  vn°7 

Remark.  —  The  reason  why  the  last  example  is  not  good,  lies  in  the  so-called  crow 
relation,  an  explanation  of  which  follows  farther  on. 

C.      With  Seventh  sustained. 


159. 


C:    n7     IV  n7 

The  last  succession  of  chords  is  often  used.  It  forms  a  delaying  of  the 
cadence-progression  of  the  second  degree  into  the  fifth  by  means  of  the 
chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth  of  the  tonic  triad  introduced  between  them. 
The  chord  of  the  Sixth  also  of  the  same  triad  often  occurs  during  the 
resolution  of  this  chord,  as  in  example  c. 

The  diminished  Seventh  chord  is  often  used  in  like  manner : 

* 


1  • 


160. 


g:    vnw7   U:l  V 

Here  also  the  natural  progression  is  only  delayed  by  the  chord  of  the 
Sixth-and-Fourth. 

The  mechanical  combination  of  such  successions  of  chords  may  be  left  to 
individual  practice  and  investigation.  Their  use  will  depend  upon  the 
insight  acquired  into  the  relation  and  connection  of  chords,  and  therefore 
not  be  so  lightly  estimated,  as  might  first  appear ;  in  general  it  will  stand 
about  in  the  same  relation  to  composition  itself,  as  technical  studies  and 
preliminary  exercises  to  the  practical  execution  and  performance  of  musical 
works.  Both  produce  readiness  and  skill,  cultivate  the  powers,  and  render 
the  productions  of  genius  possible. 

Only  it  may  be  further  observed  here,  that  for  the  criterion  of  such  com- 
bination the  relation  of  the  Seventh  to  the  root  and  its  progression  will  always 
be  found  sufficient.  If  this  is  pure  and  the  movements  of  the  other  parts 
commit  none  of  the  heretofore  mentioned  errors,  the  chord  connection  will 
be  serviceable  for  particular  cases. 


161. 


Exercises. 

L  j_. 


6  6 

65747 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


6  75  26 


7  66 

76         5         64        5 


y '    ~*^      JPI  — | — ———__— 4. 


I 


6          6 
547776 


747 


6          6 
547 


765 


-1=^: 


5          4          7 


7^ 6 


7. 


J8- 


7         6 


*  4          6  67 

72635  4ik 


Remark.  —  Many  of  the  cases  above  cited  could  not  yet  be  included  in  these  exercises, 
because  they  are  based  upon  modulation,  which  is  hereafter  more  fully  explained  (The 
iixth  exercise  affords  opportunity  for  modulation.)  So  too,  many  of  these  examples  by 
the  use  of  modulation  would  have  been  smoother  and  less  stiff  and  strange. 


CHAPTER  IX. 
Chords  of  the  Ninth,  Eleventh  and  Thirteenth. 

Most  treatises  contain  lengthy  discussions  upon  these  chord-formations. 

e  views,  whi^h  can  be  maintained  concerning  them,  are  various  and 
ill  lead  to  equally  practical  results.     It  may  be  said 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY.  $9 

either,  that  these  groups  of  intervals  are  to  be  considered  and  treated 
like  real  chords,  as  e.  g.  the  Seventh-chord : 

or,  that  as  unessential  chord-formations  they  either  belong  to  the  suspen- 
sions, or  result  incidentally  from  one  part  being  sustained. 

In  the  first  case,  the  explanation  of  their  use,  especially  through  their 
inversions,  becomes  very  diffuse,  and,  since  in  four-part  harmony  one  or 
several  of  their  tones  or  intervals  are  always  omitted,  obscure,  because  they 
are  then  easily  confounded  with  other  chords. 

In  the  second  case  their  explanation  is  very  much  simplified. 

Remark.— Chords  of  the  Ninth,  as  well  as  the  others  above  named,  are  but  relics  of  the 
old  so-called  Thorough  Bass  system,  which  readily  adopted  every  combination  of  tones, 
however  casual  it  might  be,  as  a  special  chord,  and  taught  its  treatment,  without  arrang- 
ing the  many  incidental  chord-phenomena  under  a  definite  system,  and  thereby  rendered 
the  entire  harmonic  system  difficult  and  prolix. 

Without  being  able  here  to  discuss  farther  the  intrinsic  theoretical  grounds 
for  classifying  such  formations  as  incidental,  the  possibility  of  simplifying  the 
harmonic  system  without  real  practical  disadvantage  has  determined  us  to 
take  the  latter  view.  (More  upon  this  point  in  the  second  section.) 

But  in  order  to  obtain  a  clear  perception  of  them,  we  shall  show  the  for 
mation  of  these  incidental  chords,  and  add  some  observations. 

If  a  Ninth  be  added  to  the  Dominant-Seventh-chord,  a  chord  results 
which  is  known  by  the  name  of  the  Dominant-Ninth-and-Seventh-chord. 


In  major  we  find  the  major  Ninth,  in  minor  the  minor. 

In  pure  part-writing  tiffs  chord,  like  that  of  the  Dominant  Seventh  itself 
in  similar  relations,  is  used  with  a  preparation  of  the  Ninth  or  of  the 
and  cases  like  the  following,  where  both  tones  enter  without  it, 


-e- 


are  to  be  condemned  for  their  stiffness  and  lack  of  connection. 
This  preparation  can  be  made  thus : 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


better: 


164. 


How  far  the  first  examples  may  be  regarded  as  Suspensions,  the  last  as 
other  incidental  chord-formations,  can  only  be  discussed  later  in  Section 
Second. 

Remark.  —  From  the  chord  of  the  Ninth  in  major  they  derive  the  Seventh-chord  of  iht 
teventh  degree,  which  we  fully  discussed  before,  also  the  diminished  Seventh-chord  from  the 
Ninth-chord  in  minor,  in  order  to  be  able  to  form  their  cadence-progression  similarly 
to  other  Seventh-chords,  affirming  that  these  chords  are  themselves  Dominant-Seventh' 
chords  with  the  Ninth  added  and  the  root  omitted,  e.  g. 


165. 


'C:    V7 


Hence  arises  in  the  first  this  difficulty,  that  we  must  accept  two  chords  of  the  seventh 
degree  in  major,  one,  whose  natural  cadence  is  the  following : 


166. 


the  other  as  derived  from  the  Dominant-Seven th-chord;  whereas  it  still  remains  the 
simplest  course  to  point  to  the  character  of  the  leading  tone,  upon  which  the  above  chords 
are  based. 

Many  musical  treatises  admit  also  collateral  Ninth-arid- Seventh  chords, 
rendering  the  theory  of  many  harmonic  formations  still  more  complicated 
and  equally  needless,  since  none  of  these  tones  are  to  be  used  without 
preparation,  and  hence  in  their  entire  treatment  and  consequences  differ  in 
nothing  from  suspensions. 

What  holds  good  in  practice,  as  well  as  in  a  simplified  theory  of  Ninth- 
chords,  will  be  in  greater  measure  true  of  the  Eleventh-and-Thirteenth* 
chords. 

The  singular  form  of  these  chords  in  full  is  as  follows: 


167. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


91 


In  pure  four-part  writing  they  can  of  course  never  be  employed,  since 
oy  the  necessary  omission  of  many  intervals  they  will  appear  simply  as 
suspensions,  e.  g. 


168, 


and  even  with  more  than  four  parts  they  will  not  differ  hi  the  least  in  character 
from  suspensions,  and  in  the  freer  style,  where  they  appear  without  prepar- 
ation, they  may  be  regarded  as  appoggiaturas. 


p-~  —  =1 

£^ 

1  —  HI; 

CHAPTER  X. 

Chromatic  Alteration  of  the  Principal  Harmonies.    Altered 

Chords. 

The  chromatic  alteration  of  one  or  more  intervals  of  the  principal  harmo- 
nies has  a  double  effect : 

either :  it  results  in  a  modulation, 

or :  it  gives  the  chord  a  new  form  hitherto  not  used. 

Let  for  example  the  major  triad  be  changed  as  follows,  and  there  result 

a.  Modulations : 

169. 

Through  c$  the  diminished  triad  of  the  seventh  degree  in  D  major  or  D 
minor,  or  of  the  second  degree  in  B  minor, 

Through  efr  the  C  minor-triad, 

Through  e\)  and  g\>  the  diminished  triad  of  the  seventh  degree  in  Dfr 
major  and  minor,  or  of  the  second  degree  in  Bb  minor. 

The  last  two  alterations  are  mere  transpositions  of  the  same  triad  into 
other  keys,  namely  Cb  major  and  C#  major. 

b.  New  forms. 

a.  b.  c.  d.  e.  f. 


170.  <^i=&- 


Of  these  the  forms  a,  b,  J,/can  indeed  incidentally  occur  by  means  of 
collateral  (passing)  tones,  but  they  have  no  harmonic  value. 


92 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


Not  so  with  the  forms  c  and  e,  which  have  harmonic  (chord-like)  meaning. 

The  first  form  of  the  triad  (c)  is  known  as 

THE  AUGMENTED   TRIAD. 

This  chord  we  have  already  found  on  the  third  degree  in  minor  (see  p. 
43,)  yet,  as  has  been  mentioned,  it  seldom  appears  in  this  position,  but 
oftener  as  the  triad  of  the  first,  fourth  and  fifth  degree  in  major  with  the 
fifth  raised  chromatically. 

It  is  easy  to  explain  as  resulting  from  the  passing  note  (ff$)  to  the  follow- 
ing note  (a),  as  also  its  progression  is  fixed  through  this  tone  (##)  as  an 
augmented  interval. 


171. 


The  inversions  (transpositions)  also  of  this  chord  are  available : 

6  6 


172. 


IV 


M 


% 


m 


IV     vii 


Though  these  chords  generally  appear  as  passing  chords  or  with  prepar- 
ation of  the  augmented  fifth,  yet  they  may  enter  free  in  a  sudden  change  of 
harmonies : 

flin 

*=E 

:4=t 
173. 


Not  only  may  the  Dominant- Seventh,  which  happens  the  most  frequently, 
be  added  to  the  augmented  triad,  but  also  the  major  Seventh  of  the  first  and 
fourth  degree. 

a.     The  augmented  triad  in  connection  with  the  Dominant- Seventh. 


174. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 
JD,     In  connection  with  the  Seventh  of  the  first  degree. 


C.     The  addition  of  the  Seventh  to  the  augmented  triad  of  the  fourth  degrte 
thould  be  very  rare : 


176. 


In  all  these  combinations  so  far  the  cadence-progression  of  the  Bass  (e.  g. 
V-I  I-IV  &c.)  has  been  employed  ;  but  a  few  examples  may  show  that  the 
chords  here  treated  may  be  used  with  chords  of  other  degrees  and  a  different 
Bass-progression. 


177. 


or: 


These  harmonic  connections,  sometimes  strange  and  harsh  in  sound, 
acquire  significance  only  through  the  position  which  they  assume,  and  par- 
ticularly when  to  a  certain  degree  they  are  brought  about  by  an  inward 
necessity. 

If  it  is  the  duty  of  a  manual  to  point  out  the  possibility  of  such  harmonic 


94 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


formations,  its  duty  is  likewise  to  warn  the  beginner  against  overrating  the 
value  of  such  attractions,  and  in  general  to  advise  him,  not  to  occupy  himself 
purposely  with  such  uncommon  harmonic  expedients,  before  he  is  wholly 
conversant  with  the  treatment  of  the  simplest  harmonies,  of  simple  pure 
part-writing.  Too  early  employment  of  them  and  a  wilful  searching  for 
peculiar  effects  obstructs  a  clear  view  and  insight  into  simple  harmonic 
principles,  even  renders  it  impossible,  and  diverts  the  mind  from  essential  to 
secondary  matters. 

Exercises. 


178. 


Remark.  —  In  the  fourth  exercise  the  augmented  fifth  was  used  even  with  the  minor 
triad  of  the  second  degree  (at  NB.,)  which  in  this  connection  does  not  sound  unnaturally. 
This  would  correspond  with  the  form/ above  in  example  170.  Hence  it  is  seen,  that  with 
a  natural  movement  of  parts  many  new  chord-formations  may  be  obtained. 


iz    (which  is  also  treated 


From  the  form  e  of  example  170 :    iaxi 

T72- 

under  the  name :  double  diminished  triad)  there  arises  a  harmony  which  is 
much  used,  namely : 

THE  CHORD  OF  THE  AUGMENTED   SIXTH. 
The  first  inversion  of  the  above  chord  gives ; 


179. 


From  its  progression,  which  is  determined  by  the  augmented  Sixth  , 

the  original  chord  here  belongs  to  G  minor,  whose  fourth  degree,  C  minor, 
through  the  raising  of  the  root  inclines  to  the  fifth  degree. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


95 


Wherever  this  chord  appears  with  its  natural  progression,  as  shown  above 
in  179,  the  last  chord  proves  itself  to  be  the  Dominant.  This  is  verified  by 
certain  harmonies  formed  like  the  chord  of  the  augmented  Sixth,  the  chords 
of  the  augmented  Sixth-Fourth-and- Third  and  of  the  augmented  Sixth-and- 
Fifth,  whose  construction  is  explained  farther  on. 

Remark.  —  The  affinity  of  the  augmented  Sixth-chord  with  those  just  mentioned,  has 
its  origin  in  the  source  of  the  former. 

The  chord  of  the  augmented  Sixth  has  this  peculiarity,  that  only  its  Third 
(the  Fifth  of  the  original  chord)  can  be  doubled  in  four-part  harmony : 


180. 


Of  the  other  positions  of  the  original  chord  (the  so-called  double  dimin- 
ished triad,)  the  jfirst  (fundamental)  may  be  used  in  three  parts,  though  very 
rarely ;  the  third  (second  inversion)  also  in  four  parts,  but  only  in  widely 
dispersed  harmony. 


tetter: 


181. 


Remark.  —  The  chromatic  alteration  of  an  interval  of  the  minor  triad  is  already  included 
in  the  formations  in  Nos.  169  and  170,  and  therefore  needs  no  further  investigation.  Sc 
the  chromatic  alteration  of  an  interval  of  the  diminished  triad  will  result  either  in  major 
or  minor  triads,  or  formations,  which  are  to  be  found  in  the  examples  above  cited. 

Thus  the  form  of  the  triad  in  No.  1 70  d.  will  be  like  the  following  as  found  in  C  major : 


better  in  open  position 


182.   3E: 


C;    vn° 


In  many  books  this  chord  is  called  :  major-diminished  triad. 

Chords  of  this  sort,  if  they  may  be  called  such,  usually  appear  only  incidentally  in 
})assing,  and  their  progression  follows  relatively  to  their  intervals,  i.  e.  augmented  interval* 
ascend,  diminished  intervals  descend,  one  degree. 

The  chromatic  alteration  of  an  interval  of  the  Seventh-chord  was  partially 


96 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


noticed  above,  where  to  the  triad  chromatically  altered  the  Seventh  also  was 
added  (p.  92.)     This  was  in  the  case  of  the  augmented  triad : 

Among  the  other  collateral  Seventh-chords,  the  chromatic  alteration  of  one 
of  them  receives  a  special  importance.  It  is  the  Seventh-chord  of  the  second 
degree  in  minor,  which  hi  the  following  form  produces  chords  that  are  often 


The  chromatic  elevation  of  its  Third 


183. 


a,: 


gives  the  following  inversions : 


184. 


Of  these  inversions  the  second  is  the  most  important,  and  is  much  used, 
the  others  are  rare. 

The  chord  resulting  from  the  second  transposition  is  known  as 

THE  CHOKD  OF  THE  AUGMENTED  SIXTH-FOURTH-AND-THIRD. 

Its  progression  is  based  upon  that  of  the  original  chord,  i.  e.  as  the  seventh- 
chord  of  the  second  degree  leads  directly  to  the  dominant,  so  also  here  it 
will  be  the  case. 


185. 


i 


a:     ii  °7 


If  the  root  be  omitted  hi  this  chord,  we  have  the  augmented  Sixth-chord 
already  found  above,  whose  progression  to  the  dominant  finds  here  its  expla- 
nation (see  p.  94) : 

omitting  the  root; 


186. 


or  as  compared  with  179  in  G  minor: 


chrom.  elevation    chord  of  augm.        chord  of  augm. 
mdam.  chord:       of  the  third:   Sixth-Fourth  <k  Third:       Sixth: 


187.1 


9' 


g:  ix°7 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY.  9" 

Remark.  —  It  may  here  be  further  observed,  that  the  formation  of  the  chord  of  the  aug' 
mented  Sixth-Fourth-and-Third  can  be  reached  also  through  the  major-diminished  triad 
mentioned  on  page  95,  by  the  addition  of  the  Seventh:  only  that  the  resolution  must  ba 
different,  since  that  was  taken  on  the  seventh  degree,  while  this  is  found  on  the  second. 

Instead  of  the  root,  the  Ninth  of  the  original  chord  may  also  be  added, 
whence  arises  the 

CHOltD  OF  THE  AUGMENTED  SIXTH-AND-FIFTH. 
Its  foundation  is  the  following : 

Inveriiont: 

root  omitted        a.  &          b.  £  *    v£ 

original  chord:    with  ninth:  &  third  raised:  5  3 

188. 


Of  these  chords,  that  which  results  from  the  first  transposition  a.,  the 
augmented  Sixth-and-Fifth  chord,  is  the  most  available :  the  others  are  rare. 

Its  natural  progression  is  likewewise  to  the  dominant,  but  always  produces 
parallel  Fifths. 


189. 


This  progression  of  fifths,  not  classed  among  the  most  offensive,  is  avoided 
either  by  a  previous  resolution  of  the  fifth  (the  original,  above-mentioned 
ninth  as  a  suspension,)  as  in  the  following  example  (a),  or  by  a  movement 
of  the  same  to  the  third,  whence  arises  the  augmented  Sixth-chord  (ft),  or 
most  frequently  by  sustaining  the  third  and  fifth  while  the  Sixth  and  Bass- 
tone  move,  whereby  the  chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth  is  inserted  before 
the  resolution  (<?),  and  can  be  regarded  here  as  a  prolongation  of  the 
suspension. 


190. 


Remark.  — The  addition  of  the  ninth  does  not  entitle  this  harmony  to  be  pronounced  a 
Ninth-chord;  the  ninth  has  here  the  same  character  as  a  suspension  as  elsewhere,  as  is 
clearly  apparent  from  the  progression  a. ;  the  progression  in  6.  and  c.  also  corresponds 


98 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


precisely  to  the  treatment  of  suspensions,  so  far  as  (like  the  fifth  in  the  above  chord)  they 
require  preparation. 

It  would  follow  from  this,  that  this  harmony  should  have  been  first  spoken  of  together 
with  suspensions  themselves;  yet  mention  of  it  had  to  be  made  here,  because  we  are 
treating  of  construction,  and  should  not  with  the  above-mentioned  views  ignore  a  univer- 
sal method  of  naming  this  harmony. 


191. 


^ -i-_^    (yf L 


3. 


In  closing  this  chapter,  we  survey  once  more  the  wide  field  which  it  opens 
for  harmonic  formations.  We  have  discovered  much  that  is  universally 
known  and  useful,  much  has  appeared  to  us  unavailable  and  worthless  ;  yet 
nothing  was  manifested  in  its  primitive  state ;  everything  was  trimmed  and 
subjected  to  change,  to  a  certain  degree,  embellishment.  This  abandonment 
of  original  form  induces  us  to  call  attention  again  to  what  was  said  on  p.  93. 

It  was  indeed  a  long  time  before  these  harmonic  transformations  were 
discovered,  and  still  longer  ere  they  were  turned  to  general  use ;  and  much, 
that  has  hitherto  proved  useless,  may  still  in  time  be  brought  to  perfection ; 
only  it  is  not  advisable,  from  a  desire  for  originality,  to  direct  all  effort  to  the 
invention  of  new  harmonic  forms,  or  to  an  exaggerated  use  of  them  and  a 
departure  from  original  principles,  lest  the  sound  inner  kernel  be  lost. 

Since  all  these  formations  serve  rather  for  the  decoration  and,  we  might 
say,  the  more  elegant  carrying  out  of  simple  harmonic  principles,  one  must 
only  use  them  with  discrimination,  or  his  work  will  be  overladen  and  him- 
self consequently  roputed  as  void  of  taste. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY.  99 

In  closing  this  representation  of  all  the  essential  harmonies  and  their 
immediate  use,  we  annex  further  a  brief  view  of  the  same,  theii  kinds  and 
derivations. 


View  of  all  the  Chords  belonging  to  a  Major  or  Minor  Key. 

I.    FUNDAMENTAL  HARMONIES. 
a.  The  triad.  6.  The  Seventh-chord. 


i 


A.     Kinds  of  triad: 
Mayor,  minor,  diminished,  augmented. 

Major  triads 
of  the  major  scale:  of  the  minor  scale: 


0:    I        IV        V  a;    V       VI 

Minor  Triads 
of  the  major  scale:  of  the  minor  scale: 


C:   II        in       VI  ^     a:    i        iv 

Diminished  triads 
*fffhe  majorjscale:  ^of  the  minor  scale; 

p=^-fe 

O:   vn°  a:  n°    vn° 

Augmented  triad  of  the  minor  scale . 


a:    III 
The  other  augmented  triads  see  under  II :  Altered  Chords. 

Inversions  (transpositions)  of  the  triad, 
a.  Chord  of  the  Sixth.  6.  Chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourtk. 

^=  -6—*—^— 


100  MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 

B.     Kindt  of  Seventh-chord : 
a.  Dominant-Seventh  —  or  Principal  Seventh-chord. 
6.  Collateral  Seventh-chords. 

a.     Dominant  Seventh-chord  (major  triad  with  minor  seventh) : 
in  major  and  minor  formed  alike: 


+*     0 :  V?  c:  V?    a; 

b.     Collateral  Seventh-chords : 

1.  Major  triad  with  major  seventh 


in  major:  in  minor; 

m 


I 


> g    g —  rp      g 

_gz  «? 

0:    IjT'     TV?  a:      VI^ 

2.  Minor  triad  with  minor  seventh 

in  major:  in  minor: 


'0:    67      ni7      V17  o;    IV? 

S.  Diminished  triad  with  minor  seventh 

in  major:  in  minor: 


i 


*  C:    vn°,  '    a.-   n°7 

4.  Diminished  triad  with  diminished  seventh   ^diminished 
Seventh-chord) 

in  minor: 


a:   vii0  7 
d.  Augmented  triad  with  major  seventh 

in  minor: 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 
Inversions  (transpositions)  of  the  teventli-chords : 

a.  Chord  of  the    b.  Chord  of  the  Sixth-      c.  Chord  of  the 
Sixth-and-Fifth;     Fourth-and-Third;  Second: 


101 


HI.    CHROMATICALLY  ALTERED  CHORDS. 
a.      Tfie  augmented  triad  formed  from  the  major  triad  : 

jn 7      *  7  7    _ 

C :    I  IV  V 

b.     Chord  of  the  augmented  Sixth,  formed : 

1.  from  the  minor  triad  with  the  root  raised  (so  called  double  diminished 
triad): 


2.  from  the  Seventh-chord  of  the  second  degree  in  minor  (see  the  follow- 
ing chords.) 

C.      Chord  of  the  augmented  Sixth- Four  th-and- Tliird  ; 

d.      CJwrd  of  the  augmented  Sixth-and-Fifth,  —  both  formed  from  the 
Seventh-chord  of  the  second  degree  in  minor : 

With  the  ninth  from 

Raising  of          Second  Root  omitted          the  root  and  without 

the  third:        Inversion:      Clwrd  of  augm.  Sixth:        the  latter: 


c; 


102 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


CHAPTER  XI 
On  Modulation. 

THE  term  modulation  has  a  varied  meaning.  Formerly  it  signified  the 
method  of  arranging  the  succession  of  harmonies  to  a  given  melody.  In 
the  modern  sense  we  understand  by  it  the  transition  from  one  key  into 
another.  The  expression :  transitional  modulation,  which  is  sometimes  found, 
would  according  to  the  original  meaning  of  the  word  be  no  pleonasm. 

The  meaning  of  the  term  being  fixed,  it  next  becomes  important  to  learn 
to  recognize  and  define  every  occurring  modulation  (transition  into  a  foreign 
key :)  later,  in  the  sixteenth  chapter,  we  shall  treat  of  the  means  of  modula- 
tion, whereby  the  capacity  to  recognize  it  will  be  made  more  complete. 

A  modulation  takes  place  then,  when  a  harmony  appears,  which  is  FOREIGN 
to  the  previous  key. 

The  former  key  is  then  wholly  abandoned,  and  the  harmonies  must  be 
reckoned  as  belonging  to  the  new  key,  until  a  harmony  foreign  to  it  appears, 
which  effects  a  new  modulation. 

Thus  in  the  following  example 


192. 


a  modulation  into  D  minor  will  ensue  in  the  third  measure,  because  c%~e-g~ 
bfc  belongs  no  longer  to  O  major,  but  unmistakeably  to  D  minor,  whereas  in 
the  fourth  measure  it  is  doubtful,  whether  the  triad  of  C,  which  is  foreign  to 
the  previous  key  (D  minor,)  belongs  to  O  major  or  to  the  G  major  which 
follows,  whilst  the  modulation  into  A  minor  in  the  fifth  measure  is  obvious. 

The  Dominant-Seventh  —  as  well  as  the  diminished  Seventh-chord  must 
e?er  be  recognized  as  the  chief  means  of  modulation ;  all  other  chords  are 
ambiguous,  i.  e.  they  may  belong  to  several  keys. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


103 


Thus  the  G-major  triad  belongs  not  merely  to  G  major,  but  is  also  the 
Dominant  of  C  major  and  C  minor,  the  Subdominant  of  D  majoi,  and  the 
sixth  degree  of  B  minor. 

From  this  ambiguity  it  often  happens  that  the  modulation  can  only  be 
recognized  from  the  chords  that  follow,  as  in  general  the  decisive  modulation 
itself  can  only  be  formed  with  the  Dominant-Seventh  harmony  and  it* 
derivatives. 

A  musical  ear  can  of  itself  very  easily  catch  at  a  modulation :  it  always 
conceives  of  the  foreign  harmony  as  belonging  to  that  key  which  is  nearest 
allied  to  the  prevailing  one. 

Thus,  for  example,  the  major  triad  of  D  in 


193. 


viewed  independently,  would  belong  to  the  key  of  D  major  ;  but  in  connec- 
tion with  G  major  it  will  at  once  be  recognized  as  the  Dominant  of  G  major, 
and  the  following  chords  only  can  determine  what  key  is  to  predominate. 

A  few  examples  are  annexed  here  for  practice  in  investigating  modulation  ; 
for  further  discussion  of  this  subject  see  chapter  sixteenth. 


Exercises. 


194. 


0 :      I     G :  V7     I  C:  IV     V7     Id:  vn°  7  I   C:  I       117      V          I 


65.26  45  26 


II  *•  6       6,  •      #  6^ 7h     -  5  J 


6        J8- 


2          6 


6- 
4  — 


104 


MANUAL    OF    HARMONY. 


#    • 


0 

4  7 


6      6 
5       5 


8. 


4        7          326 


667 


1 


1K- 

The  indication  of  the  modulation  can  proceed  in  the  manner  given  in  the 
first  exercise,  by  which  the  letters  denote  the  key,  and  the  Roman  numerals, 
as  usual,  the  degrees  upon  which  the  respective  chords  are  based. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


105 


SECTION  II. 


INCIDENTAL   CHORD-FORMATIONS.    TONES   FOREIGN   TO   THE 

HARMONY. 


CHAPTER  XII. 

Suspensions. 

9 

THE  simultaneous  progression  of  each  part  to  the  following  chord,  especi- 
ally when,  as  in  our  previous  examples,  it  proceeds  without  any  metrical 
variety  of  movement,  produces  a  certain  formality  and  monotony  in  musical 
phrases. 

A  new  mode  of  linking  and  intertwining  chords,  and  hence  an  inter- 
esting variety  of  harmonic  connection  results  when  the  parts  do  not  progress 
simultaneously  throughout ;  when  one  or  more  of  them  remain  in  their 
place,  while  others  are  already  forming  the  materials  of  the  next  harmony. 

The  best  and  most  important  method « of  linking  chords  thus  together 
takes  place  through  the 

SUSPENSION. 

It  is  effected  by  the  delay  of  the  movement  of  a  part,  which  is  expected 
at  a  fixed  time  or  even  necessary,  and  that  too  hi  such  a  manner,  that  that 
voice  which  has  to  descend  one  degree  hi  order  to  take  its  place  in  the  fol- 
lowing chord,  shall  still  linger  upon  the  tone  of  the  first  chord,  while  the 
others  move  to  the  second,  and  the  former  shall  not  pass  to  the  harmonic 
tone  until  later. 

In  the  following  harmonic  combination 


105. 


106 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


the  Soprano  during  the  entrance  of  the  second  chord  can  remain  upon  c  and 
afterwards  pass  to  b,  as  follows : 


196. 


So  by  delaying  the  Tenor  in  example  195  a  suspension  can  be  formed 


197. 


G?  G? 35 


at 


The  characteristic  feature  of  suspensions  is,  that  they/orm  a  dissonance 
with  the  harmony  with  which  they  appear,  and  that  they  thereby  effect  the 
harmonic  connection,  while  through  the  expected  resolution  of  the  dissonance 
they  render  closer  the  necessary  relations  between  two  chords.  In  this 
respect  they  bear  a  resemblance  to  Sevenths,  since  like  these  as  combining 
intervals  they  are  subject  to  preparation  as  well  as  resolution. 

To  be  sure,  the  dissonance  in  a  suspension  does  not  always  consist  in  an 
interval's  forming  a  dissonance  with  some  one  part :  cases  may  occur,  where 
the  suspension  as  interval  forms  a  dissonance  with  none  of  the  other  parts, 
but  only  through  situation,  position  and  progression  the  character  of  the 
suspension  predominates,  as  in  example  397,  where  the  tone  of  the  suspen- 
sion forms  a  Sixth-chord,  and  where  only  the  unusual  appearance,  as  well  as 
the  whole  position  of  the  triad  of  the  third  degree,  together  with  the  pro- 
gression of  the  Tenor,  produces  the  character  of  a  suspension. 

The  above  examples  furnish  the  necessary  rules  for  the  formation  of 
suspensions : 

A  suspension  can  be  formed  where  a  part  descends  one  degree,  under  the 
following  conditions  :  it  must 

1.  be  prepared  and. 

2.  be  resolved. 

Thus  three  points  will  have  to  be  considered  in  a  suspension :  its  prepara 
lion,  the  suspension  itself  and  its  position,  and  its  resolution  (progression.) 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


107 


a.     The  preparation. 

The  preparation  of  a  suspension  cap  happen  through  either  interval  of  a 
triad.  Also  Sevenths  are  used  for  preparation,  though  less  often;  the 
Dominant- Seventh  the  most  frequently. 


Preparation 
through  octave  of  the  root : 


198. 


through  the  Third 

-^^J-j- 


5       - 


7        6 


-&- 


C:    I 


I    a:vn°7         I 


II  VI 


through  the  Fifth: 


J 


I^Ez-iEi 


iH 


a 


9    8 


9    8. 


E=S=j^= 


C:  I    G:  V 


vi      C:I         IV 


I    c:vn°7  i 


through  the  Dominant  Seventh: 


C:  V7         I 


IV 


The  preparation  must  be  upon  the  arsis,  the  suspension  upon  the  test's. 
Also  the  rule  mentioned  above  (p.  71)  holds  good,  that  the  preparation  may 
be  of  equal  or  longer  duration  than  the  suspension,  but  not  shorter. 

t).     The  Suspension : 

The  entrance  of  the  suspension  on  the  Thesis  has  just  been  spoken  of,  its 
Further  position  shall  be  explained  more  particularly. 

The  suspension  can  appear  in  either  voice  "before  an  interval  of  the  triad,— 
before  Sevenths  only  in  rare  cases. 


108 


MANUAL    OF   HARMON*. 


Suspension*  before  the  Octave  of  the  root : 


190. 


C:  IV         1 


before  the  Fifth  seldom,  only  in  certain  positions : 

1    4- 


-,51—1 ,5. — nL-^^u-I LE 


As  to  suspensions  of  the  fifth,  attention  may  be  called  to  remarks  under 
example  197.  Thus  the  first  and  third  example  will  be  wholly  in  the  char- 
acter of  a  suspension.  When  there  is  a  Seventh  in  the  chord,  as  in  the 
second  example,  then  the  dissonant  character  of  the  suspension  comes  out 
at  once. 

That  the  Seventh  can  only  seldom  have  a  suspension  follows  from  this, 
that  in  most  cases  the  latter  must  be  formed  by  the  perfect  octave,  which  of 
itself  is  only  a  doubled  interval,  but  can  never  be  in  a  dissonant  position 
(a,),  unless  as  hi  the  following  example  b.  the  octave  be  diminished. 


200. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


109 


In  the  first  case  the  seventh  will  be  always  a  passing  one. 
c.     The  resolution. 

The  resolution  of  the  suspension,  as  was  said  before,  takes  place  by  the 
descent  of  the  same  part  one  degree. 

Remark. — Irregular  kinds  of  resolution  will  be  exhibited  later. 

It  is  here  further  to  be  observed : 

The  resolution-tone  (that  which  is  delayed  by  a  suspension)  must  be  con- 
tained in  no  other  part;  only  the  Bass  or  lowest  part  can  take  it  without 
injuring  the  harmony. 


C.    not: 


d.  NB. 


201. 


In  example  a.  the  Tenor  moves  from  a  to  c,  which  last  is  suspended  in  the 
Soprano  by  d  ;  in  example  c.  the  Tenor  takes  g,  which  has  the  suspension  a 
in  the  Alto.  Both  these  cases  of  doubling  are  incorrect,  especially  because 
they  are  concerned  with  the  third  and  fifth  of  the  chord.  In  the  example 
d.  at  NB.  it  is  the  root  that  is  doubled.  The  effect  in  this  case  is  better, 
particularly  when  consistency  hi  the  movement  of  parts  requires  it,  as  in  the 
following  phrase. 


Soot: 


Third: 


Fifth: 


202. 


Remark.  —  It  may  be  further  observed  here,  that  the  doubling  of  the  root  always  pre 
supposes  a  distance  of  one  Octave  at  least,  and  that  to  double  in  the  unison  is  incorrect, 
e.g. 


only  between  Bass  and  Tenor  or  in  the  part  lying  next  to  the  lowest  the  suspension  may 
appear  even  in  such  close  proximity. 

The  lowest  part,  usually  the  Bass,  has  however,  as  that  which  determine! 
the  chord,  a  counteracting  influence  against  the  dissonance  of  the  suspension* 


110 


MANUAL    OF   HALMONf. 


incorrect: 


so  that  doubling  is  admissible,  if  it  be  founded  on  a  good  movement  of 
parts,  e.  g. 

_J^-L^=^ 


203. 


The  incorrect  progression  of  the  Soprano  and  Bass  in  the  last  example 
becomes  clear,  if  we  remove  the  suspension,  as  a  mere  delaying  of  the 
nnvernent,  by  which  open  octaves  result. 


204. 


The  same  is  the  case  with  progressions  by  fifths,  which  are  covered  bj  the 
suspension : 


205. 


Here,  however,  the  same  considerations  will  govern,  as  are  usually  taken 
into  account  in  cases  of  concealed  fifths,  since  position,  situation,  and  progres- 
sion will  admit  of  such  a  part-movement,  without  the  disagreeable  effect  of 
fifths  being  prominent. 

We  briefly  condense  these  observations  in  the  following  rule : 
Suspension  does  not  remove  parallel  octaves  and  fifths.     The  following 
progression,  therefore,  will  be  erroneous  : 


206. 


parallel  fifths  of  this  kind,  however,  are  not  to  be  rejected  unconditionally, 
provided  the  unpleasant  succession  be  counterbalanced  by  the  movement  of 
the  other  parts,  so  as  not  to  be  too  conspicuous.  It  is  impossible  to  give 
positive  directions  on  this  point;  to  reject  them  invariably  would  be  too 
restrictive. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


Ill 


Suspensiors  in  the  Bass,  which  generally  occur  before  the  third  of  the 
chord  (or,  which  is  the  same  thing,  before  the  chords  of  the  Sixth  or  of  the 
Sixth-and-Fifth,)  admit  of  no  doubling  in  She  other  parts. 


not: 


207 


Suspensions  before  the  root  and  the  fifth  in  the  Bass  seldom  prove  of  use 


not: 


208. 


The  figuring  of  suspensions  in  Thorough  Bass  writing  is  partially  con- 
tained in  the  above  examples. 

If  the  suspension  lie  in  one  pf  the  three  upper  parts,  the  interval  reckoned 
from  the  Bass  is  given  together  with  the  resolution,  e.  g.  ^  T  8  7  6  •  ^e 
other  figures  determine  the  chord  where  it  is  necessary,  e.  g.  the  chord  of 
the  Sixth  |£j  the  chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth  \~^  or  \^ 

If  the  suspension  be  in  the  under  part,  the  incidental  intervals  of  the 

other  parts  are  also  indicated  by  figures,  e.  g.  g  Z!>  or  w^n  the  seventh-chord 

5  — 

4  —  the  lines  that  follow  denote  that  the  parts  retain  their  tones  while  the 

suspension  is  being  resolved. 

A  suspension  in  the  Bass  is  also  denoted  by  a  cross-stroke  over  it,  and  the 
proper  chord  placed  over  the  resolution-tone,  which  in  respect  to  the  latter 
is  more  distinct,  e.  g. 


209. 


In  the  following  exercises  the  former  method  is  adopted,  as  most  in  use. 


112 


MANUAL    OF   HARMO.VY. 


Exercises. 


5-  «  7857 

43          76         5  5-         43 

-.          ^     ~«g- _ 


36         91 


210. 


ftS^fei 


C:      I          V        IV        V7     I        xi7        V7       I 

f  6  -          9  8          7 


3.  5       -  6 

32-76          75 


L   JL«    * 


6-          7- 
54  43 


5       — 


8 26  62          5 


6  98  3- 


1 


5  — 
4  3 


6. 


7  J8* 
4    -    « 

3-4 


27  765          987 


6  5 
6  44 


786  5- 

'•          ^  43 


5          -         '# 


-  6 


'•          <*  *»  i       6  JB  3h    6  2       I          4       3- 

ft  6  66 

5  °*       3       6  987SR9  t  '    «       I          S       •• 


4  5 3_7 

s — (51 


76  4_  5_     6 

5~  76-326  434  765 


/ 


^  In  working  out  these  and  the  following  exercises  it  will  be  expedient  to 
divide  the  parts  and  writ©  each  upon  a  separate  staff.     This  mode  of  writing 


jfANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


113 


in  scoi<5  afrbrds  a  better  view  of  the  movement  of  each  individual  part, 
beside  being  generally  a  useful  exercise  preparatory  to  reading  from  score. 

It  is,  however,  necessary  here  to  write  the  parts,  which  in  pure  part 
writing  are  always  considered  as  vocal,  hi  the  clefs  which  have  always  been 
assigned  to  them,  a  knowledge  of  which  is  indispensable  to  every  musician. 
Familiarity  with  these  clefs  may  soon  be  acquired  by  attentive  practice  and 
comparison  with  those  already  known. 

Remark.  —  A  knowledge  of  the  Alto  and  Tenor  clefs  is  essentially  necessary  for  under- 
standing and  reading  scored,  as  many  vocal  and  instrumental  parts  are  written  solely  o! 
partially  in  these  clefs,  and  even  the  knowledge  of  the  Soprano  clef,  which  more  rarely 
occurs,  greatly  facilitates  reading  in  the  case  of  various  instruments,  which  have  a  partic- 
ular pitch. 

The  clef  used  for  the  three  upper  parts,  Soprano,  Alto  and  Tenor,  is 
called  the  G-clef. 

For  the  lowest  vocal  part,  Bass,  the  F-clef  or  Bass-clef,  which  has  been 
employed  hitherto,  still  holds  good. 

The  position  of  the  C-clef  always  indicates  c  of  the  third  octave,  and  for 
the  Soprano  this  c  is  placed  on  the  lowest  line,  for  the  Alto  on  the  third,  and 
for  the  Tenor  on  the  fourth,  e.  g. 


Soprano, 


Alto, 


Tenor-clef. 
or~: 


The  ordinary  compass  of  the  voices  in  these  clefs  stands  thus : 


Tenor-fief. 


114 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


Remark.  —  It  is  interesting  to  trace  the  origin  of  these  differem  clefs  frun  a  very  temple 
basis,  the  so  called  Tablature  (a  staff  of  usually  ten  lines,  on  which  the  parts  were  all 
written  with  especial  indication  of  those  lines,  upon  which  the  three  principal,  tones  F  C  G 
were  to  stand,)  but  a  further  explanation  would  carry  us  here  too  far. 

The  easiest  method  of  fixing  these  clefs  in  the  mind  might  be,  to  observe 
carefully  the  position  of  the  (7-triad  in  the  different  voices,  by  which  the 
intermediate  and  adjacent  tones  are  easily  found. 

Thus  the  position  of  the  (7-triad  in  full,  with  the  root  doubled,  will  be : 


In  the  Soprano: 
In  the  Alto: 


In  the  Tenor,  best  in  the  position     itemftj 
of  the  chord  of  the  nxth-and-fourth:      5^ZJL 


We  annex  here  the  first  exercise  of  210,  written  out  in  these  clefs: 


• 


TENOB 


BASS. 


To  work  out  these  examples  with  all  due  observance  of  the  rules  thus  far 
given,  requires  an  easy,  somewhat  free  movement  of  the  part  in  respect  of 
position,  since  the  necessity  of  a  better  distribution  of  the  suspensions  often 
demands  a  change  in  that  distribution  of  the  parts,  which  we  have  hitherto 
always  endeavored  to  keep  as  uniform  as  possible. 

Thus  it  will  be  clear  when  to  use  the  open  position  of  parts,  which  must 
again  be  exchanged  for  the  close  position,  whenever  necessity  and  expediency 
require  it. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


113 


In  thus  shifting  the  positions  of  the  mrts,  these  rules  must  be  observed : 
The  parts,  in  passing  from  one  to  another  (differing)  chord,  must  never 

move  either  by  steps  or  skips,  out  of  their  proper  place  SIMULTANEOUSLY  ; 

only  in  single  cases,  where  ONE  and  the  SAME  chord  is  transferred  to  another 

position. 

Either  part  may  leave  its  position,  when  one  or  more  are  sustained  upon  one 
tone. 

The  8th  exercise  of  210,  worked  out  as  follows,  will  make  this  clearer. 


BASS, 


a     _        c  —  7         a"7  d         *7     Bb  Eb  Bb        U7  F  7 
,.    j     —      iv—  7      ii°7Bb:inV7    I     IV    I    F:V7IBb:V7 


13 


r—-X=     --—r---^ 


i 


i  "T I JULC I  ~" 


B.    g      c  F7    Bb    c  g       e  Eb  a°7  D      7        g 

g:  D7    i      ir      Bb:  V7    I      n      0.- i       ir  VIn°7V     7        I 


Let  the  following  serve  to  explain  this : 

The  close  position,  in  which  this  example  begins,  is  in  the  fifth  measure 
abandoned  for  the  open ;  this  in  turn  continues  till  the  close  appears  again 
in  the  eleventh  measure. 


116 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


This  was  effected  by  a  freer  movement  of  the  Soprano  and  Tenor.^  The 
former  in  the  fifth  measure  moves  away  from  its  position  to  the  Seventh 
E\)  (at  NB.)  a  skip  which  may  take  place  if  the  root  is  already  there  and 
remains  fixed  (as  F  here  in  the  Bass ;)  BO  in  the  seventh  measure  it  leaves 
its  position  by  skipping  to  the  fifth  g,  the  rest  of  the  chord  being  sustained, 
by  which  the  suspension  falls  into  a  better  place.  Finally  the  close  position 
is  again  reached  by  a  free  and  better  movement  of  the  Tenor  in  the  tenth 
measure. 

Suspensions  from  below. 

Suspensions  from  below  are  to  be  regarded  as  such  only  in  a  few  single 
cases ;  most  progressions  of  this  sort  have  originated  in  the  suspension  from 
above  hitherto  treated,  by  a  contraction  (shortening)  of  the  same,  followed 
by  an  upward  movement,  e.  g. 


213.    3fc= «!zt± 


The  suspension  from  below  may  take  place  in  the  progression  of  the 
leading  tone : 


214. 


and  with  many  intervals,  which  ascend  a  half  degree,  especially  with  those 
altered  chords,  that  contain  augmented  intervals  by  elevation,  Q.  g. : 


215. 


It  should  be  observed  here  that,  as  formerly,  the  resolving  (harmonic) 
tone  can  stand  in  no  other  part  but  the  Bass. 

Remark.  —  The  last  of  the  above  examples  gives  us  tte  same  combination  of  tones, 
which  resulted  above  (p.  64)  as  the  seventh-chord  of  the  first  degree  in  minor,  and  which 
wag  pronounced  useless  as  a  fundamental  harmony  (seep.  74).  That,  used  as  above,  it  it 
•imply  to  be  regarded  as  a  suspension  of  the  leading  tone,  needs  no  farther  explanation. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 
Other  suspensions,  especially  those  that  ascend  a  whole  degree, 


117 


in  some  cases  evince  of  themselves  what  is  unnatural  in  their  progression  ; 
in  others  are  pronounced  by  theory  as  not  genuine  or  available  in  pure 
part-writing,  however  often  they  may  find  their  place  in  practice.  Should 
these  improper  suspensions  be  carried  out  in  the  manner  above  shown  (213), 
incorrect  progressions  would  appear  as  their  base : 


Suspensions  in  several  Parts. 
Suspensions  may  occur  in  several  parts  at  once : 


Suspensions 
in  two  voices : 


in  three  voices : 


218. 


Also  the  chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth  often  appears  as  a  double  suspen- 
sion, e.  g. : 


219. 


Freer  movement  of  Parts  in  Resolving  Suspensions. 

In  our  previous  examples  the  preparation,  entrance  and  resolution  of  the 
suspension  took  place  through  two  chords,  since  the  parts  not  concerned 
remained  stationary  during  the  resolution.  The  same  may  also  take  place 
with  three  chords,  by  which  the  change  of  chord  and  the  part-movement 
become  yet  richer  and  more  varied. 

This  happens  when,  during  the  resolution  of  the  suspension,  one  of  the 
parts,  gene -ally  the  Bass,  or  several  at  once,  move  and  form  thereby  a 
harmony. 


8  MANUAL    OF   HARMONY 

For  instance  by  progression  of  the  Bass : 


820. 


596  6          9       7          4      ,,  7 

:  V7        I    —          n7    V      I  I       IVn7      Ia;vn°7    I 


By  progression  of  several  parts : 


221. 


C  :  I 


ii 


In  all  these  examples  the  resolution  of  the  suspension  follows  regularly 
during  the  progression  of  the  other  parts  to  a  new  harmony,  of  which  the 
resolution-tone  forms  a  part. 

Remark.  —  By  way  of  illustration  of  the  view  expressed  in  chapter  ninth  concerning 
chords  of  the  Ninth,  it  may  be  remarked  here,  that  many  passages,  in  which  the  Ninth 
occurs,  and  which  are  recognized  by  many  as  Ninth-chords,  may  be  explained  in  the  above 
manner,  as  in  example  221  b.,  where  the  cadence-progression  of  the  roots  F-b  is  easily  and 
far  more  simply  represented  as  a  progression  of  a  suspended  Ninth  by  the  use  of  three  chords, 
and  leads  to  the  same  result,  as  is  likewise  seen  in  all  the  following  examples : 

Ninth  suspension 

with  two  chords :    with  three  chorda  : 


222. 


Concerning  the  unprepared  Ninth  we  shall  speak  later  tinder  Organ  point. 

As  supplement  to  what  was  said  in  chapter  ninth  it  may  be  further  added,  that  as  an 
trgument  against  independent  ninth-chords  may  be  reckoned  also  the  impossibility  of 
transposing  them  together  with  the.  root  in  such  a  way  that  the  latter  shall  be  brought  into 
Immediate  proximity  to  the  Ninth,  as  may  always  be  done  in  the  case  of  seventh-chord* 


223. 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 
9 


iSL 


119 


9 &- 


So  four  chords  may  be  used  with  a  suspension,  provided  it  stands  before  a 
harmonic  tone,  which  is  not  contained  in  the  other  parts,  e.  g. 


1  234 


without  tuspenaion: 
1         234 


224. 


^^=30=5 


~0- 


5     6 
4 


-&-^~*^-&-  -&-  -&- 


-i^sz. 


Exercises. 

3-  56 

796          4474.  .7  6 

r . JQ. U     r._.    -_,     U_      ^     /P 


6          7       7 


a25. 


6          766          5 

822         6-4          5-5          4 


6         747 


V       M  *  V  V «/  V*        ^y  W  V  |     X  | 


3. 


36          97         47-         94- 


6  6 


5 

4         4 

2         3 


966 
6  7          5  47 


i 


4          2  6?b          96—4          6—6          7 


5    £ 


2  6          76—46     — 


R  46  66- 

*  824  4          5 


120 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


1-  5  • 

t         0         f  43 9  7        36          7        4 6  3        74       7 


8          5 

5          47 


3         25  _6—43 


7  6  7- 

'" 


7       9        6 


Between  a  suspension  and  its  resolution  other  tones  may  be  inserted  in  the 
same  part. 

These  may  be : 

1.  Tones  belonging  to  the  chord,  e.  g. 


tr-z^     J%_  _^_    _^r-        1~3£: 3I^a=5 tc 


2.  Tones  foreign  to  the  harmony,  appoggiaturas,  e.  g. 


227. 


-£2_T_ 


j 

5r-^— « 


A  more  complete  explanation  of  these  and  similar  passages  will  be  given 
farther  on  under  the  description  of  passing-notes  and  appoggiaturas. 
Passages  also  occur,  where  the  suspension  has  no  resolution  at  all,  e.  g. 


usually  thus; 


228. 


They  have  resulted  by  elision  from  the  following  phr 


ases 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


121 


1 


or: 


-&- 


JT7. — |F= f— 
yEg=#=?=fe 


^- 


1 


Anticipation. 

The  anticipation  of  a  tone,  which  is  of  less  frequent  use  than  the  suspeu 
sion,  is  the  reverse  of  this,  and  consists  in  one  or  more  parts  allowing  tones 
of  the  chord  next  succeeding  to  be  heard  sooner  than  others,  and  before  the 
metrical  structure  would  lead  them  to  be  expected. 

Where  notes  are  of  long  duration,  and  in  slow  movements,  this  method  of 
progression  seldom  or  never  occurs,  since  the  harshness  of  the  dissonances 
that  appear  would  amount  to  unintelligibility ;  it  is  generally  only  in  shorter 
divisions  of  the  measure  that  anticipation  takes  place,  e.  g. 


Anticipation 
in  the  Bass: 


in  the  Soprano: 


in  several  parts: 


23O. 


The  resemblance  of  this  part-movement  in  its  metrical  form  to  that  known 
in  the  general  musical  system  as  syncopation,  is  unmistakeable,  only  that  the 
latter  is  formed  or  acquires  rhythmical  value,  not  by  the  anticipation  of  chords, 
but  rather  by  their  after  striking. 

Here  also  the  movement  of  the  parts  may  under  circumstances  be  freer, 
e.  g.  another  harmonic  tone  may  be  anticipated  beside  that  which  was 
intended  for  the  entrance  of  the  chord,  as  in  the  familiar  closing  phrase : 


231. 


As  the  reverse  of  anticipation  may  further  be  mentioned  the  afterstriking 
of  harmonic  tones,  which  so  far  resembles  suspensions,  that  here  also  prepara- 
tion and  resolution  take  place,  but  differs  again  essentially,  since  its  character 


122 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


impresses  itself  more  upon  the  metrical  and  rhythmical  movement,  conse* 
quently  it  always  appears  also  in  a  longer  series,  whereas  suspensions, 
whether  singly  or  in  greater  numbers,  appear  under  totally  different  condi- 


tions. 


A  series  of  such  delayed  tones  would  be  the  following  in  the  Bass : 
Allegro. 


JL  ^    ^  ^    J.     « 


Under  this  head  also  would  be  classed  the  unison  passage  in  Beethoven's 
Overture  to  Leonora  (No.  3)  : 


. 


833. 


t 


k 


. i , T i i i- — •,. i — \ — -\ 

hsJ^^JsdaHFr^CT^ 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY.  123 


CHAPTER  XIII. 

Organ-point.    Sustained  parts. 

A  PECULIAR  variety  of  harmonies  and  mingling  of  the  same  is  produced 
by  sustaining  one,  and  even  more  parts,  upon  one  tone,  and  by  the  chords 
thus  incidentally  formed. 

We  often  find,  especially  in  the  Bass,  as  well  at  the  beginning  of  a  piece 
as  in  the  middle  and  at  the  close,  where  a  cadence  should  appea*,  a  long- 
continued  tone,  while  the  other  parts,  apparently  without  any  relation  to  it, 
continue  their  harmonic  movement. 

When  this  tone  lies  in  the  Bass,  it  is  called 

ORGAN-POINT; 
when  such  long-continued  tones  occur  in  the  other  parts,  we  call  them : 

SUSTAINED  PARTS  OB  SUSTAINED  TONES. 
Remark.  —  Many  give  to  these  last  also  the  name  Orgar-point,  but  not  rightly. 

The  tones  adapted  for  sustaining  are  the  Tonic  or  Dominant ;  both  at  one* 
also  occur. 

Remark.  —  Attempts,  which  in  later  times  have  been  made  with  the  third  of  the  triad  by 
many  composers,  sound  unnatural  and  forced. 

The  harmonic  connection  as  also  the  progression  of  the  remaining  parts 
during  the  organ-point  still  takes  place  according  to  the  established  rules, 
the  lowest  of  them  acting  as  guide  to  the  harmony,  and  in  general  without 
regard  to  the  sustained  tone. 

A  few  examples  follow  first,  before  discussing  in  detail  the  mode  of  treat* 
ing  organ-point. 


a.     Organ-point  on  the  Tonic  : 

I         I  J      I       *      . 

J  -«-  J 1 


234.   fl  I  i    f  rir  r 

=3^= 


124 


MANUAL    OF   HARMON* 


6.    oil  the  Dominant : 

*      1 


_z3_;-.^-|-a&< — 

=g=iz±?r±=t=iiiii- 


gB-i  — 

CZH 

—  —  

_£L  

c.    or: 


d.    on  both  at  once: 


*.   *. 


In  these  examples  the  chords  to  which  the  Bass-tone  does  not  belong 
harmonically,  are  marked  with  a  cross. 

The  following  remarks  may  serve  for  the  treatment  of  organ-point : 

1.  The  entrance  of  the  organ-point  must  be  at  a  time  rhythmically  marked, 

2.  By  a  chord,  to  which  the  Bass-tone  harmonically  belongs, 

3.  The  last  chord  of  the  organ-point  must  also  harmonize  with  the  same. 
The  first  takes  place  at  the  beginning  or  end  of  a  period  or  section  thereof 

and  upon  the  accent ;  the  second  and  third  usually  through  the  root  of  a 
triad,  as  in  example  234  a.  c.  </.,  or  as  in  b.  through  the  chord  of  the  Sixth- 
and-Fourth. 

It  is  further  to  be  observed,  that  the  chords  foreign  to  the  Bass-tone 
should  not  follow  one  another  too  frequently,  but  often  alternate  with  chords 
to  which  the  organ-point  belongs  harmonically.  This  is  necessary  in  order 
to  avoid  digressions,  which  would  destroy  the  character  of  the  organ-point, 
which  lies  in  the  close  union  of  different  chord-connections. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 
Thus  the  following  organ-point  would  be  faulty  in  this  respect : 


125 


235, 


i  •* 


i 


The  part  lying  next  to  the  Bass,  in  four-part  composition  the  Tenor, 
becomes  in  the  case  of  organ-point  the  foundation  of  the  harmonic  move- 
ment. Hence  all  the  necessary  progressions  will  depend  upon  this  voice, 
even  though  the  organ-point  might  accidentally  belong  to  the  harmony. 
Thus  in  example  234  a.  the  progression  of  the  Bfr  in  the  Alto  (in  the  first 
measure)  is  determined  by  the  movement  of  the  other  parts,  and  not  by  the 
fact  that  it  is  the  Seventh  of  the  Bass. 

If  the  organ-point  be  upon  the  Dominant,  as  is  often  the  case  at  the  close, 
there  can  be  no  plagal  cadence  formed  upon  it,  as  follows  from  the  third  of 
the  rules  above  cited,  e.  g. 

KB. 


236. 


»JL>. 


I 


The  plagal  cadence  may  however  be  used,  if  the  organ-point  be  upon  the 
Tonic : 


237. 


The  end  of  the  organ-point  is  to  be  heeded  with  full  as  much  care  as  tho 
entrance.  In  the  above  examples  this  always  takes  place  with  a  cadence. 
In  this  case  there  is  no  difficulty,  except  in  passages  like  that  in  No.  236. 
The  organ-point,  however,  may  pass  sooner  into  the  harmonic  movement, 
and  then  the  third  rule  must  be  carefully  observed,  e.  g. 


126 


238. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


To  break  off  in  this  manner  would  not  be  good : 

4 uJ-rJ-iJ-.L ^-Jt 



239. 


vj J_htfiiig~ — atziijr=jiz=a=zmi=TF 


J-* — x — U* — £ — tt 


Sustained  Parts. 

Sustained  upper  and  middle  parts  upon  one  tone  after  the  manner  of  the 
above-described  organ-point  are  much  less  frequent  than  the  latter,  and 
require  greater  caution  in  their  treatment. 

Sustained  tones  of  this  sort  suit  the  character  of  these  parts  only  when 
the  chords  not  belonging  to  them  appear  very  seldom,  since  these  parts  have 
not  the  power  to  act  as  a  counterpoise  against  foreign  chords,  this  being  the 
peculiar  property  of  the  Bass  or  the  lowest  part  as  that  which  determines 
the  harmony. 

Thus  the  organ-point  in  example  234  «.,  when  transferred  to  the  highest 
part,  will  sound  very  unpleasantly  in  the  last  measures : 


240. 


1 


whereas  the  following,  where  the  Dominant  is  the  sustained  tone,  is  betterr 
for  the  reason  that  the  last  chords  of  the  example  belong  to  the  same : 


241, 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


127 


As  an  3xample  of  effective  use  of  sustained  parts  and  continued  tunes,  and 
for  the  treatment  of  the  same,  may  be  cited  a  passage  in  the  "  Gloria  "  of 
Cherubmi's  Mass  in  C  major,  where  the  violins  hold  a  long  A^,  while  the 
chorus  and  accompanying  instruments  below  it  carry  on  their  peculiar 
melodic  and  harmonic  progressions ;  also  the  D  of  the  violins  iw  the  intro- 
duction to  the  Overture  "  Calm  sea  and  happy  voyage "  by  Mendelssohn- 
Bartholdy.  In  both  passages  chords  will  seldom  be  found,  to  which  the 
sustained  tone  does  not  harmonically  belong. 

Here  also  may  be  classed  the  Trio  of  the  Scherzo  of  Beethoven's  A-major 
Symphony,  which  is  throughout  based  upon  the  A,  that  appears  sometimes 
as  a  sustained  tone  in  the  upper  and  middle  parts,  sometimes  as  an  organ- 
point  in  the  lowest,  and  serves  as  a  foundation  through  the  entire  piece. 

Sustained  tones  in  the  middle  parts  are  to  be  treated  with  the  same 
consideration  as  in  the  highest  part.  In  instrumental  compositions  they  are 
always  proportionately  reinforced :  in  four-part  harmony  they  occur  bnt 
seldom  and  not  at  too  great  a  length,  e.  g. 


242. 


Remark.  —  As  supplementary  to  what  has  been  said  of  chords  of  the  Ninth,  may  be 
added  the  following. 

In  the  above  example  b.  we  find,  if  the  sustained  tone  be  reckoned  with  it,  a  complete 
Ninth-chord  in  inverted  position  with  a  regular  resolution.  It  has  been  already  oaid  of 
Ninth-chords  that  their  transpositions  cannot  be  so  used  that  the  root  and  ninth  shall  be 
brought  into  close  proximity,  KS  with  the  Seventh.  That  they  may  occur  simultaneously 
at  a  greater  distance,  as  above,  affords  no  reason  for  regarding  them  as  independent 
chords,  when  they  only  occur  in  the  above  relations,  namely,  with  a  sustained  tone,  whose 
character  it  is  to  support  harmonies  which  are  foreign  to  itsejf,  as  e.  g.  is  the  case  v^th  the 
following  Ninth,  which  in  reality  forms  no  chord  of  the  Ninth. 


128 


MANUAL    OF   HARfoONY. 


When  the  harmonic  progression  is  to  be  indicated  by  figures  over  the 
organ-point,  they  must  always  have  reference  to  the  tone  sustained  in  the 
Bass,  so  that  in  many  cases  the  usual  figuring  of  chords  becomes  changed. 

Thus  the  organ-point  in  No.  234  b.  might  be  figured  in  this  manner : 


9 

6    —    7 
4-5 


?    « 

4       4 


7       7 
4 


8 
647 

4     2 


244.  9h=? tz± 


=£ 


I 


This  mode  of  figuring,  being  difficult  to  see  readily  and  at  the  same  time 
imperfect,  is  only  employed  for  special  purposes,  so  that  in  scores,  where 
figuring  is  used,  we  often  find  with  the  organ -point  the  words  "  tasto  solo" 
indicating  that  in  the  usual  organ  accompaniment  only  the  organ-point  itself 
is  to  be  given. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 
Passing  notes.    Appoggiaturas. 

UNDER  tones  foreign  to  the  harmony  are  especially  to  be  classed  passing- 
notes  and  appoggiaturas. 

The  former  result  from  filling  out  greater  or  smaller  harmonic  intervals 
with  the  intermediate  tones,  e.  g. 


245. 


The  notes  marked  x  are  passing,  those  marked  0  are  secondary  harmonic 
tones,  that  is,  so  far  as  we  regard  the  first  note  as  belorging  to  the  triad 
of  (7  or  A.  e.  g. 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 


129 


246. 


The  passing  notes  under  a.  in  example  245  are  called  diatonic,  those 
under  A.  chromatic. 

Passing  notes  move  from  one  harmonic  note  to  another  ;  hence  they  appear 
not  with  the  entrance  of  the  chord,  but  after  it,  in  subdivided  parts  of  the 
measure,  and  can  only  be  used  by  successive  degrees. 

Appoggiaturas  on  the  other  hand,  are  those  tones  foreign  to  the  harmony 
which  either  appear,  like  a  suspension,  with  the  entrance  of  the  harmony 
(that  is,  in  this  sense,  on  the  accented  part  of  the  measure,)  and  be  close  to 
the  harmonic  note  (247  a.,)  or,  like  passing  notes  on  the  unaccented  part  of 
the  measure,  serve  as  a  melodic  ornament  to  two  notes  of  the  same  pitch 
(247  b.) 


247. 


An  appoggiatura,  therefore,  may  enter  "by  SKIPPING,  but  must  be  next  to  the 
harmonic  note,  as  is  seen  in  the  examples  in  247. 

It  is  further  to  be  seen  from  the  above  examples,  that  appoggiaturas  can 
be  formed  as  well  with  the  note  immediately  below  the  harmonic  note,  as 
with  that  above. 

The  appoggiatura  below  the  harmonic  note,  especially  if  struck  upon  the 
accent,  has  this  peculiarity,  that  it  gladly  forms  a  minor  second  to  the 
principal  note,  by  which  chromatic  tones  are  produced,  as  may  be  seen  from 
247,  ani  phrases  like  the  following  could  not  be  written : 


248. 


130 


MANUAL    OF   HARMCNY. 


This  is  especially  true  of  appoggiaturas  introduced  by  skips. 

The  case  is  different  if  they  follow  one  another  by  degrees,  by  which  they 
at  once  assume  the  character  of  passing-notes.  Thus  the  following  succes- 
sion of  appoggiaturas  a.  need  not  of  necessity  be  written  as  in  b  • 


249. 


Appoggiaturas  below,  not  falling  upon  the  accent,  need  only  at  times  the 
minor  second.  Thus  example  250  a.  need  not  necessarily  be  written  as  in 
b.y  while  c.  is  not  as  good  as  d. 


250. 


v" 

This  point  does  not  admit  of  fixed  rules,  nor  are  they  indeed  essential, 
inasmuch  as  every  musical  ear  will  surely  determine  what  is  right. 

Remark.  —  The  third  of  the  triad  suffers  the  appoggiatura  to  be  a  whole  degree,  soonei 
than  the  fifth  or  octave.  Since  in  the  last  case  the  appoggiatnra  may  appear  likewise  as 
the  seventh,  decision  must  be  made  in  accordance  with  what  follows. 

Appoggiaturas  above  the  harmonic  note,  whether  they  enter  free  (by  skips) 
or  as  in  250,  may  form  major  and  minor  Seconds  to  the  tone  of  the  chord, 
because  they  are  always  formed  diatonically,  and  are  therefore  regulated 
according  to  the  key  or  modulation. 


*     *     *          *      *      * 

*n    *  +    /^ *  _       __ 


251. 


We  often  find  figures  where  appoggiaturas  above  and  below  the  chord- 
note  are  used  alternately,  e.  g. 


B52. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY.  13] 

This  is  the  basis  of  the  following  embellishment,  which  often  occurs : 


253.   i 


Passing  notes  and  appoggiaturas  may  occur  in  all  the  parts.  If  it  be  in 
we  only  by  way  of  preference,  this  will  contrast  strongly  with  the  rest,  and 
acquire  an  olligato  character,  while  they  serve  as  an  accompaniment.  If 
this  is  not  the  case,  then  all  the  parts  can  be  alternately  made  prominent  by 
such  secondary  notes,  and  gain  thereby  increased  importance.  In  general 
where  the  position  and  progression  of  a  part  is  adapted  for  the  introduction 
of  such  notes,  it  is  thereby  made  susceptible  of  greater  melodic  significance ; 
but  even  here,  unless  the  proper  proportion  be  hit  upon,  a  crowded  and 
confused  effect  may  be  the  result 

The  following  simple  harmonic  phrase 


254. 


II 


^ 


by  the  use  of  these  secondary  tones  might  be  written  thus : 


255. 


132 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


__ J J J — J-T  * r-ri J T-J *~ 


The  passing  notes  and  appoggiaturas  are  here  marked  by  crosses  x. 

It  may  be  seen  in  the  above  example  that  a  phrase  can  easily  suffer  from 
§uch  an  accumulation  of  tones  foreign  to  the  harmony,  if  it  is  executed  in 
quick  Tempo,  whereas  a  slow  movement  is  better  adapted  to  this  style  of 
writing. 

As  has  been  already  remarked  in  the  case  of  suspensions,  care  must  be 
taken  also  in  the  use  of  appoggiaturas,  that  no  part  shall  contain  the  har- 
monic tone  which  in  another  is  introduced  by  an  appoggiatura9  e.  g. : 


256. 


This  can  only  happen  when  the  harmonic  tone  is  at  least  one  octave 
removed  from  the  foreign  note,  e.  g. : 


i 


-<&- 


257. 


According  to  the  principles  of  doubling,  the  root  or  fifth  is  better  adapted 
than  the  third  of  the  original  chord  for  such  a  purpose. 

In  case  of  a  quicker  movement,  however,  and  longer  continuance  of  such 
figures  formed  of  appoggiaturas,  there  are  other  considerations,  as  the  follow- 
ing phrase  will  show,  which  indeed  cannot  be  conceived  of  as  a  four-part 
vocal  passage : 


258. 


With  regular  passing  notes  the  same  considerations  hold  good  as  to  prox- 
imity to  harmonic  tones,  and  figures  like  259  a.  b.  are  not  as  pure  as  in  c.  d. «. 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 

6.  3.  d. 

\ 


133 


Here  also  more  rapid  figures  sooner  admit  of  this  proximity,  e.  g. : 


^I&^E 


^-* 


260. 


Erroneous  progressions  with  Passing  Notes  and  Appog- 

giaturas. 

As  it  is  the  office  of  passing  notes  to  fill  out  the  interval  wheie  a  skip  if 
made  in  the  harmonic  progression,  care  must  be  taken  in  changing  the 
harmony,  that  no  false  progressions  arise,  as  in  the  following  examples  where 
concealed  fifths  become  open : 


261. 


r 


Si 


r 


Open  octaves,  formed  with  passing  tones,  may  not  occur,  as  the  first  of 
them  will  be  equally  harmonic  with  the  second : 


tOn  the  contrary,  in  the  following  cases  the  passing  notes  do  not  cover  the 
en  octaves,  and  are  therefore  faulty : 


263. 


Remark.  — In  instrumental  composition,  where  strengthening  and  doubling  i»  intend* 
inch  octai  2s  might  he  used. 


I 


134 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


Likewise  the  entrance  or  progression  of  an  appoggiatura  by  direct  motion 
to  be  pronounced  faulty,  if  it  proceed  as  follows : 


letter: 


264. 


The  last  example  is  better,  for  the  reason  that  the  octave  progression  is 
covered. 

Passing  Notes  and  Appoggiaturas  in  several  parts  at  once. 

A  direct  motion  of  thirds  and  sixths  is  best  adapted  for  passing  notes  in 
•everal  parts  at  once,  e.  g. : 


865. 


JP*  1 

t  '.     r  i 

1  i      i    it 

The  free  movement  of  parts  with  the  aid  of  passing-notes  may  produce 
also  parallel  seconds,  fourths,  fifths,  sevenths  of  all  kinds ;  these  require, 
however,  great  care,  and  on  account  of  harshness  are  admissible  only  in 
tingle  cases  and  under  very  favorable  positions. 

Progressions  of  fourths  are  good  when  another  part  takes  the  third 
below: 


266.  dt— i 


Single  fifth-progressions,  formed  by  passing-notes,  are  found  sometimes  in 
food  compositions,  which,  however,  affords  no  ground  for  recommending 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


135 


them  in  general  as  faultless  (see  remarks  upon  consecutive  fifths  on  p.  27 
and  elsewhere.) 

In  like  manner  the  harshness  of  successive  sevenths  is  alleviated  only  by 
favorable  position,  good  progression  of  all  the  parts,  and  in  general  by 
Tempo,  movement,  etc. 

In  contrary  motion  the  varied  intervals  of  passing  notes  often  give  tha 
movement  a  new,  peculiar  coloring,  and  add  greatly  to  the  independence  of 
parts,  only  they  should  not  be  too  crowded  or  appear  in  too  many  parts  at 
once.  * 


287. 


Here  also  it  will  be  found  that  those  passing  notes,  which  with  others, 
outside  of  the  simple  fundamental  harmonic  structure,  form  as  it  were  an 
inner  new  (passing)  harmonic  movement,  are  more  natural  and  smoother 
than  those  whose  combination  cannot  be  shown  to  be  harmonic. 

The  value  of  such  movements  can  only  be  judged  of  with  reference  to 
their  character  and  Tempo. 

In  regular  diatonic  progressions  several  parts  at  once  may  have  passing 
notes,  e.  g. : 


268. 


The  main  point  in  all  such  passages  is,  that  at  the  change  of  harmony 
which  in  the  last  example  occurs  at  the  half-bars,  the  parts  shall  be  sa 
disposed  as  to  admit  of  a  regular  formation  of  their  progression. 

Appoggiaturas  can  occur  in  differen  •  parts \ 

a.     in  two  parts : 


186 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


in  direct  motion: 


in  contrary  motion: 


270. 


=E  i  i^    ii 
7-,-rr   Trr-r  1 


i 


b.     in  tftee  parts : 
271. 


v-  -*_• »-     f-nnr 


C.    in /owr  parts: 

272. 


fiemark.  —  Most  of  the  above  examples  can  also  pass  for  harmonic  progressions  upon 
an  organ-point. 

It  appears  from  these  examples  that  for  appoggiaturas  also,  in  a  direct 
movement  of  two  parts,  progressions  of  thirds  and  sixths  are  the  most 
natural,  while  parallel  seconds,  fourths,  fifths  and  sevenths  always  have  a  very 
harsh  effect.  Thus  no  one  could  easily  pronounce  as  good,  appoggiaturas 
like  the  following : 


good  _ 


273. 


|r— i  i    i  good 


Appoggiaturas  may  also  be  of  greater  length  than  the  harmonic  note  that 
immediately  follows  them.    e.  g. 


274. 


SSZ3 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY.  137 

As  regards  composition,  the  importance  of  the  matters  explained  in  chap- 
ters twelve  to  fourteen  inclusive  is  sufficiently  great  for  subjecting  them  to  a 
careful  examination,  as  a  thorough  knowledge  of  them  aids  essentially  in 
understanding  the  inward  harmonic  structure  of  a  composition.  —  It  yet 
remains  to  speak  of  their  relation  to  pure  part-writing,  the  object  of  our 
next  study. 

As  on  page  24  we  spoke  but  generally  of  the  term  "  pure  part-writing," 
it  here  becomes  necessary  to  limit  the  question  more  closely  and  present  it 
somewhat  thus : 

What  application  of  these  materials  for  composition  is  allowed  by  our  next 
object,  practice  in  pure  part-writing  ? 

It  is  undeniable  that  these  materials  especially  adapt  themselves  to  the 
perfection  and  adornment  of  the  parts. 

If,  however,  our  immediate  concern  be  with  the  recognition  and  working 
out  of  simple  harmonic  formations,  then  indeed  whatever  is  adapted  for  the 
perfection  of  the  parts  may  properly  be  used,  but  all  else,  serving  them 
merely  for  ornament,  must  be  put  aside ;  in  brief,  a  distinction  made  between 
the  essential  and  non-essential. 

With  the  non-essential  must  invariably  be  classed  first  of  all : 

Whatever  is  affected  in  harmony  generally,  so  far  as  there  lies  at  the  root 
of  it  no  inward  necessity  ;  unnatural  introduction  of  harmonies  little  used. 

These  readily  occasion  superfluity,  bombastic  overloading  of  the  piece, 
and  rather  give  evidence  of  a  sickly  or  mentally  weak  condition,  than  of 
originality  and  a  fresh,  free,  strong  and  steady  action ;  again : 

irregular  employment  of  suspensions  ;  the  use  of  sustained  partst  of  anti- 
cipated and  delayed  tones  ;  but  especially : 

appoggiaturas  abruptly  used  and  the  figures  formed  from  them,  in  short, 
whatever  is  inconsistent  with  simple,  good  four-part  song. 

Vocal  composition  being  generally  accepted  as  the  basis  of  all  music,  much 
will  naturally  be  excluded  from  it  which  is  proper  in  instrumental  works. 

Although  for  practice  in  the  use  of  harmonies  and  for  the  study  of  good 
and  pure  part-movement,  the  writing  of  chorals  or  simple  movements  in 
choral  style  is  suggested  as  most  serviceable,  yet  even  this  will  not  exclude 
the  use  of  those  materials,  so  far  as  they  serve  not  only  as  ornamental,  but 
also  as  perfecting  the  movement  of  parts. 


|38  MANUAL    OF   HARMON*. 

Herewith  is  particularly  to  be  reckoned  the  use  of  suspensions,  regular 
passing  notes  and  appoggiaturas. 

From  what  has  been  said  may  now  be  estimated  the  strictness  of  pure 
part-writing  at  the  commencement  of  the  study  of  harmony  and  in  later 
contrapuntal  work,  which  prohibits  much  as  inexpedient,  unessential  and 
diverting  from  the  main  point,  that  in  practice  may  readily  be  used  at  proper 

times. 

A  complete  understanding  of  all  the  subjects  hitherto  treated  will  be 
greatly  assisted  by  the  thorough  study  of  good  compositions :  for  individual 
experiment  opportunity  will  be  afforded  in  chapter  nineteen  in  the  third 
section  of  this  book,  in  which  we  shall  recur  to  these  topics. 


CHAPTER  XV. 

Passing  Chords. 

PASSING  CHORDS  are  those  which  like  passing  notes  in  several  parts 
appear  in  smaller  subdivisions  of  the  measure  as  real  chord-formations,  but 
whose  entrance  and  treatment  deviate  at  times  from  the  general  rules  of 
chord-connections. 

One  species  of  these  has  been  already  seen  in  those  passing  notes  and 
appoggiaturas  in  three  parts,  which  assume  the  form  of  a  chord,  e.  g.  in  Nos. 
271  and  272.  So  in  one  sense  most  chords  formed  upon  an  organ  point  may 
be  called  passing. 

There  are,  however,  other  cases  of  this  sort,  which  we  shall  here  explain. 

As,  hi  the  main,  passing  notes  and  appoggiaturas  rest  chiefly  upon  rhyth- 
mical relations,  it  becomes  necessary  also,  for  the  explanation  of  passing 
chords,  to  glance  at  the  different  divisions  of  time. 

It  is  known  that  in  simple  even  kinds  of  time  the  natural  accent  falls  upon 
the  first  part  of  the  measure,  while  the  second  has  less  weight. 

Now  if  the  harmonic  progression  be  simply  based  upon  the  two  divisions 
of  the  measure,  so  the  harmonies  also,  which  fall  upon  the  accented  part 
(thesis),  must  be  regarded  as  the  most  important  and  aa  the  point  alwayi 
to  which  the  chords  of  the  second  part  are  directed: 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 


189 


875. 


In  this  sense  the  chords  in  the  second  half  of  the  measure  may  be  called 
passing  chords,  although  moving  thus  uniformly  their  character  does  not 
•tand  out  so  prominently. 

That  this  has  been  so  understood  in  theory,  though  seldom  plainly  ex- 
pressed, is  proved  by  the  fact  that  greater  care  at  their  entrance  has  always 
been  bestowed  upon  the  chords  on  the  thesis,  and  much  that  was  inadmissible 
allowed  to  those  on  the  arsis. 

The  character  of  passing  chords,  however,  appears  more  distinctly  in 
harmonies  which  are  assigned  to  the  lesser  divisions  of  the  measure ;  as  in 
the  following  examples : 


270. 


277. 


m 


The  peculiar  appearance  of  the  chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth  in  example 
276  a.  and  c.,  as  also  of  the  Seventh-chord  in  c.  is  to  be  explained  only  a$  a 


140 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 


movement  of  all  the  parts  ly  degrees  in  the  character  of  passing  notes  to  th* 
position  aimed  at  (the  chord  on  the  thesis  of  the  following  measure.) 

These  parts  may  appear  still  better  in  their  character  as  passing,  if  one 
part  be  sustained,  e.  g.  the  Bass  277  a.,  or  the  upper  parts  b.  (see  above 

277.) 

By  the  use  of  both  methods  arose  the  part-movement  in  27 6  a. 

If  this  condition  (the  movement  of  parts  by  degrees)  be  fulfilled,  then  all 
chords  may  enter  free,  and  find  explanation  in  the  chord  which  terminates. 


278. 


^  KB.  KB. 

_-J_ J?~*~iu  -]\  J    i  4i  J  J    |    i  I     it  ^^^rT: 


Remark.  —  The  free  treatment  of  the  seventh  before  mentioned  finds  its  warrant  also  in 
this  explanation  of  passing  chords  (see  N.  B.) 

In  the  simple  uneven  kinds  of  measure  the  accent  falls  likewise  upon  the 
first  part,  while  there  are  two  parts  of  less  weight  Passing  chords  will 
appear  thus: 


279. 


__LJt— 3 .        |—  I    *>    *       ,  ,        v     .    *    *      |    *i  _ 


-p- 

75      6 


Smaller  divisions  of  the  measure  may  also  contain  passing  chords,  exam- 
ples for  which  are  not  necessary  after  what  has  been  said,  neither  for  the 
compound  kinds  of  measure. 

Here  also  the  study  of  good  compositions  will  serve  to  illustrate  and 
assist. 

For  individual  exercise  the  following  remarks  may  be  in  place. 

All  chords  indicated  as  passing  will  either  progress  according  to  the  known 
rules  of  harmonic  connection  or  deviate  therefrom.  In  the  former  case,  the 
most  frequent,  no  further  remark  is  needed  ;  in  the  latter  it  will  depend  on 
a  flowing,  melodious  movement  of  the  parts,  as  well  independently  consid- 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


141 


ered,  as  in  relation  to  one  another,  whether  formations  of  this  kind  are  to 
be  considered  correct.  It  can  only  be  said  in  general,  that  here  also  th* 
movement  of  the  parts  by  degrees  will  determine  the  character  of  the  passing 
chords,  and  that  all  such  passages  must  be  estimated  with  reference  to  the 
rhythm,  Tempo  and  character  of  the  piece. 


CHAPTER  XVI 

Means  of  Modulation. 

THE  term  modulation  has  already  been  explained  in  chap,  eleven. 

Having  there  treated  of  the  proper  method  of  determining  all  modulations, 
we  shall  now  discuss  the  principal  means  of  producing  them. 

The  art  of  modulation  consists  in  discovering  such  harmonies  as  stand  in 
relation  to  two  or  more  keys,  that  through  them  we  may  pass  from  one  key 
into  another. 

Any  modulation  can  be  effected  in  different  ways,  and  will  serve  various 
purposes.  It  may  be 

first:  sudden  in  appearing,  of  short  duration  —  and  passing,  or 

second :  with  longer  preparation,  seeking  the  new  key  as  an  end  and  acting 
longer  as  a  basis. 

In  the  former  case  it  will  employ  the  simplest  means,  be  decisire,  but 
leave  the  new  key  speedily,  and  of  itself  even  have  no  determined  validity : 
in  the  latter,  it  is  usually  through  various  means  prepared  and  carried  out 
by  degrees,  seeks  to  impress  the  new  key  upon  the  ear,  and  itself  leads  to  a 
finite  conclusion.  Thus  in  the  following  example 


280. 


6      2 


6 
4     7 


§3: 


C:     F:  V, 


G:  V, 


a:  V, 


C:   I 


142 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


the  modulation  is  pausing,  changing  often,  without  essentially  leaving  the 
main  key  G  major. 

This  kind  of  modulation  is  only  adapted  to  the  keys  nearest  allied,  and 
though  others  more  remote  may  be  reached  by  special  and  absolute  methods, 
their  development  must  be  guided  by  perfectly  natural  and  organic  connec- 
tions, or  they  will  appear  unintelligible. 

In  the  next  example,  however,  the  more  remote  key  becomes  the  end, 
which  is  gradually  reached ;  the  original  key  is  wholly  abandoned,  and  the 
new  takes  its  place : 


281. 


C:    Iib:vn°7Bb:I 


This  example  shows  clearly  how  the  extended  modulation,  having  the  new 
key  as  its  end,  makes  use  of  the  passing  modulation  in  order  to  reach  it ; 
the  rather,  as  it  was  not  the  purpose  here  to  pass  quickly  into  Eb  major. 

Unless  these  short  phrases  are  employed  as  interludes  between  two  pieces 
of  different  keys,  or  as  exercises,  their  use  in  composition  must  be  in  a 
special  manner,  as  upon  this  very  formation  of  modulations  rests  in  part  that 
also  of  periods  and  their  connections.  This  is,  however,  an  important  branch 
of  the  study  of  form,  and  has  to  do  with  the  order  of  modulations  in  a  com- 
position, consequently  is  foreign  to  our  present  purpose. 

Remark.  —  An  explanation  of  this  may  be  found  in  the  author's  work :  "  The  principles 
of  musical  forms  and  their  analysis." 

At  present  we  take  as  exercises  the  formation  of  such  modulations,  in 
order  by  this  means  also  to  promote  skill  in  the  use  of  harmonies  and  their 
proper  connection.  f 

In  discovering  the  means  of  modulation,  we  pay  no  regard  at  present  to 
the  kind  of  modulation,  as  they  may  serve  for  both  kinds  indicated  above. 

The  first  and  simplest  means  will  be  itself 

THE  TONIC  TRIAD  OF  THE  NEW  KEY. 

If  this  triad,  however,  already  forms  a  part  of  the  first  key,  the  intended 
modulation  will  only  be  definitely  determined  by  what  follows,  particularly 
tf  it  be  the  dominant-harmony  of  the  new  key.  Thus  in  the  following 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


143 


example  in  a.  there  will  be  no  modulation  perceptible,  while  in  5.  first  the 
third  harmony  makes  the  key  of  G-major  to  be  distinctly  heard : 


282. 


In  the  case  of  remote  keys,  indeed,  the  effect  of  the  minor  triad  as  the 
tonic  may  be  more  decided,  yet  this  also  will  be  followed  by  the  dominant* 
harmony  for  the  sake  of  clearness  (in  a.) ;  but  the  major  triad  is  more 
readily  received  as  a  Dominant  (£.). 


i 


)==±x=te>= 

I 1  •~~t   "• 


C:  I     /:    i  V7          i        C:    I  in 


C:    I    a:     V  I      C:    I        e:  V  i 


Though  the  tonic  triad  used  as  above  for  modulation  be  so  unsatisfactory, 
yet  one  position  of  it,  the  chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth,  has  the  property 
of  rendering  a  modulation  thoroughly  decisive.  For  as  this  readily  forms  a 
part  of  the  closing  cadence  (see  pp.  49  and  53,)  with  the  same  effect  it 
produces  also  a  sense  of  modulation,  provided  it  be  not  used  like  a  passing 
chord,  but  enter  on  the  thesis.  But  also  in  this  case  the  dominant  naturally 
follows,  the  modulation  not  being  complete  without  it. 


284. 


C:    I  G:I 


d :  i       V     I 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 
On  the  arsis  it  wiU  not  indicate  the  key  so  decisively. 


285. 


All  the  above  examples,  however,  point  to  a  still  more  effective  means  of 
modulation ;  this  is  the 

DOMINANT  HARMONY. 

The  triad  as  well  as  the  seventh-chord  of  the  dominant  appears  as  the 
most  natural  and  best  means  for  modulation,  since  by  it  (particularly  as 
regards  the  dominant-seventh  harmony)  the  key  is  most  unmistakeably 
fixed. 

The  modulation  through  the  Seventh-chord  of  the  dominant  may  take 
place  without  any  intermediate  chord  in  the  following  manner. 

According  to  the  principle  that  that  harmonic  connection  is  most  intelligi- 
ble of  all,  which  is  effected  through  similar  or  sustained  tones  (preparation,) 
we  may  modulate  from  the  tonic  major  triad  through  the  dominant  Seventh 
chord  directly  into  all  the  other  keys,  except  those  of  the  minor  and  major 
third  and  the  augmented  fourth.  From  C  major  then  we  may  pass  to  all 
other  keys,  except  Eflat,  E  and  F  sharp  (whether  major  or  minor,  need 
not  be  determined  at  present)  in  the  following  manner : 


From  G      to     d: 


C       —       F: 


C       —        G: 


C        —       a: 


286. 


In  all  these  examples  the  similar  tones,  connected  by  a  tie,  effect  the  tran- 
sition to  the  dominant  of  the  next  key,  thus  from  C  major  to  d  minor  the 
tones  g  and  e,  which  become  the  Seventh  and  Fifth  of  the  dominant-harmony, 


etc. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


146 


Remark.  —  We  need  only  hint  that  these  modulations  are  attained  alsD  through  othef 
positions  of  the  chords,    e.  g. : 


C        — 


d:       or: 


. 
-&- 


If  we  wish  to  modulate  in  the  same  manner  into  the  three  keys  not  found 
above,  this  may  be  done  by  the  insertion  of  a  chord  (a  triad  is  simplest) 
which  supplies  the  desired  connection,  e.  g. 


288. 


From  minor  the  modulation  will  admit  of  these  forms : 

a         to       b:         a       —     d:         a     —       e:  a        —        F: 


289. 


_<«_  *W  _^c 


a       —      G: 


Into  the  remaining  keys  C,  Dfr,  Eb>  F#  and  Al?  through  a  connecting 
chord : 


From  a          to  C:  a          —  D\):  a       Eh: 


It  is  understood  that  this  method  of  modulating  is  merely  adduced  as  the 
simplest  principle,  and  that  a  modulation  need  not  invariably  proceed  in  this 
manner ;  also  that  as  simple  harmonic  connections  can  be  effected  without  a 
sustained  tone,  the  same  will  be  the  case  with  modulations,  as  e.  g.  the  follow- 
ing may  take  place  without  an  intervening  chord : 


146 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY 


From  C 


C       —       e: 


—       C. 


291. 


Still  for  the  connection  of  harmonies,  and  of  keys  especially,  it  will  always 
be  greatly  beneficial  to  become  thoroughly  familiar  with  that  principle,  and 
for  this  purpose  to  write  out  modulations  from  all  the  keys,  bringing  the 
chords  at  the  same  time  into  the  most  varied  positions,  and  to  illustrate  these 
connections  by  playing  them  on  the  Pianoforte. 

This  mechanical  practice  will  greatly  promote  facility  in  the  use  of  all  the 
means  of  composition.—— 

There  is  another  chord  which  shares  with  that  of  the  dominant-seventh 
this  aptness  for  modulation.  This  is  the 

DIMINISHED  SEVENTH-CHORD. 

This  chord,  which  in  most  cases  takes  the  place  of  the  Dominant-harmony, 
will  often  prove  better  adapted  for  modulation  than  the  latter,  since  its 
appearance  is  less  harsh,  especially  in  cases  where  seventh  and  root  would 
have  to  enter  simultaneously  without  preparation. 

The  following  examples  will  show  the  use  of  this  chord. 


to       B\):       C      —      B: 


C     — 


d: 


292. 


This  chord,  beside  the  above  application,  exhibits  still  further  capability 
from  its  enharmonic  nature. 
The  following  chord,  precisely  similar  in  sound,  but  differently  written : 


293. 


will  belong  to  four  different  keys,  namely :  in  the  first  form,/  minor,  in  the 
second  d  minor,  in  the  third  b  minor,  in  the  fourth  aj?  minor. 
Hence  a  fourfold  modulation  becomes  possible : 


Now  as  all  the  diminished  Seventh-chords  can  appear  in  the  following 
thre*  positions,  as  can  be  most  distinctly  seen  on  the  Pianoforte : 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


147 


295, 


each  of  which,  however,  may  by  enharmonic  change  belong  to  four  keys,  WB 
thus  have  modulations  for  all  the  twelve  keys  in  minor,  to  which  in  many 
cases  may  be  added  the  twelve  in  major,  as  this  chord  may  often  be  used  in 
major  in  place  of  the  dominant-harmony. 

As  far  as  the  intimate  connection  of  all  the  keys  is  concerned,  and  the 
variety  of  harmonic  connection,  it  will  here  also  be  very  useful  to  write  out 
diligently  this  method  of  modulation. 

Although  in  composition  itself  this  kind  of  modulation  proves  useful  iu 
many  ways,  yet  it  should  be  at  the  same  time  observed,  that  it  ought  not  to 
be  employed  too  often,  because  with  its  facility  of  application  it  loses  in 
artistic  value. 

Of  similar  use,  that  is  by  enharmonic  change,  though  not  in  so  extended 
a  manner,  is 

THE  CHORD  OF  THE  AUGMENTED  SIXTH-AND-FIFTH. 
Its  similarity  in  sound  to  the  dominant-seventh  chord : 


296, 


renders  it  well  adapted,  in  conjunction  with  the  latter,  for  modulating  into 
certain  keys  through  an  enharmonic  change,     e.  g. 


From  C      to      b; 


297, 


Though  we  have  been  seeking  above  the  means  of  passing  quickly  from 
one  key  to  another,  yet,  as  it  is  not  always  the  object  to  effect  a  modulation 
quickly  and  decisively,  we  may  to  acquire  readiness  extend  our  exercises  and 
arrange  them  thus : 

From  one  key  to  the  other  through  the  triads  of  different  degrees : 

From  G  to  d  through  the  triad  of  the  third  degree : 


298. 


148  MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 

From  C  to  d  through  the  .riad 

of  tJie  fourth  degree:  of  the  fifth  degree:  of  the  sixth  degree: 


899-  aC=S=S^ 


-&- 

of  the  seventh  degree: 


•2-^— 2— & 
-or    ~z 


75?-     V&-  _; 


-&- 


From  C  major  to  E  through  the  triad 

of  the  second  degree:  of  the  fourth  degree:  of  the  fifth  degree: 

800,  *-^ 


These  hints  may  suffice,  in  order  to  learn  to  form  other  modulations  on 
the  same  principles. 

Extension  of  the  Modulation  and  its  completion  through 

the  Cadence. 

The  above-described  process  of  passing  from  one  key  into  another,  was 
based  upon  the  simplest  and  most  natural  means. 

If  we  wish  to  extend  further  a  digression  into  a  new  key,  the  above  means 
indeed  will  serve  this  purpose  likewise,  only  we  must  not  apply  them  so 
abruptly  and  directly,  but  make  use  of  the  passing  modulation  mentioned 
before,  and  introduce  the  new  key  only  gradually.  The  use  of  the  cadence- 
formulas,  however,  will  best  determine  the  key  we  arrive  at. 

For  this  object  the  following  kind  of  exercises  may  be  employed,     e.  g. 

Modulate  from  0  major  through  d  minor,  a  minor,  G  major  to  e  minor. 

This  would  be  performed  somewhat  thus : 

301.    ,          ^  |  __  _        _ 


C. 


o;  vn 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


149 


In  adding  the  cadence  the  following  should  be  observed : 
If  the  modulation  take  place  through  the  chord  of  the  Sixth-aud-Fourth 
of  the  tonic  triad  of  the  new  key  (see  p.  1 43,)  the  following  of  the  dominant 
chord  with  its  natural  progression  is  sufficient  to  create  a  cadence,     e.  g. 


302,*— g— f= 


~o~ 


-or 


In  other  cases  the  extended  cadence  or  the  familiar  closing  formulas  will 
be  requisite  in  order  to  determine  the  final  key.  As  the  simplest  of  these 
formulas  may  be  used  the  following : 


a: 


303, 


•9r 


in  other  positions: 

i           , 
' 1 


-&- 


647 


9iE^: 


If  these  cadence-forms  be  added  according  to  the  position  of  the  last 
chord  of  the  modulation,  the  latter  is  completed. 

This  may  be  shown  in  some  of  the  former  examples. 

The  modulation  from  C  to  Eflat  No.  288  ends  there  with  the  fifth  in  the 
Soprano.  To  this  is  added  the  cadence  in  the  position  corresponding  to  tliat 
last  chord,  e.  g. : 


15Q  MANUAL    OF   BARMONY. 

From  C  to  Eft  :  Cadence : 


304. 


The  following  modulation  from  C  to  a  in  No.  286  would  require  a  cadence 
in  this  position : 


305.7 


>m  C  to  a: 


Cadence: 


*          # 


The  modulation  from  C  to  J7,  using  the  cadence  under  No.  303  I. : 
C  to  2?:  Cadence: 


306,  / 

307.  / 


or  from  C  to  Z>  \) ;  Cadence : 


~3«— J-| 


*b 

6  3t> 


*b 

»b 


BE 


I 


We  conclude  with  another  example  of  a  more  extended  exercise: 
From  G  through  e  minor,  C  major,  b\)  minor  to  A^  major. 


808 


From  G  through  e  minor,  C  major,  &b  minor  to  Ab  major. 

ztunrj: 
%&=?" 


Cadence. 


These  hints  will  suffice  to  enable  one  to  form  a  variety  of  exercises. 


OP  HARMONY. 


151 


SECTION    III. 

PRACTICAL  APPLICATION  OF  HARMONIES.    EXERCISES  FOR  THEIU 
USE  IN  PURE  PART-WRITING. 

THE  following  hints  on  the  most  practicable  form  of  exercises  in  the  use  of 
harmonies  may  serve  at  once  to  further  illustrate,  enlarge  and  complete  the 
principles  thus  far  developed.  For  this  object,  single  cases  in  given  exam- 
ples will  furnish  opportunity  for  more  extended  remarks. 


CHAPTER  XVII. 

A  simply  Harmonic  Accompaniment  to  a  given  Melody. 

FIRST  of  all  it  may  be  observed  that  we  are  here  treating  solely  of  the 
simply  melodic  progression  of  a  part,  and  for  the  present  leave  all  other 
elements  of  a  melody,  as  its  metrical  and  rhythmic  formation,  out  of  the 
question. 

1.  Harmonic  accompaniment  to  a  Soprano. 

We  select  first  the  following  simple  exercise : 


309,  =rzfc±fz=i: 


i 


For  the  sake  of  facility  we  will  add  in  the  manner  heretofore  employed, 
those  fundamental  tones  which  may  serve  in  general  as  the  harmonic  basis. 


G 


310. 


In  every  harmonic  progression  the  movement  of  the  Bats  is  the 
important. 


J52 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


We  turn  our  attention  then  to  this  first,  and  write  its  progress!^   Ju 

lows: 

311. 

SOPBANO. 


BASS. 
thus: 


312, 


The  addition  of  the  middle  parts  will  not  now  be  difficult : 
313.  C          G        C         d         G        C 


SOPBANO. 


ALTO. 


TENOR. 


BASS. 


The  above  may  serve  chiefly  as  an  illustration  of  the  exercises  them, 
selves. 

The  next  will  furnish  occasion  for  studying  the  principles  of  a  good  Bass- 
movement  as  well  as  a  melodic  part-movement  in  general,  so  far  as  the 
simplest  harmonic  progression  requires  it. 

Examples  incorrectly  written  out  will  best  serve  our  purpose. 

Exercise  with  fundamental  tones  given. 


Remark.— -In  working  out  this  and  subsequent  exercises,  we  shall  for  the  sake  of  room 
nse  the  Violin-clef,  writing  the  parts  on  two  staves;  most  urgently  recommending,  how 
ever,  for  individual  laborn  the  method  of  notation  employed  in  No.  313. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 
Let  this  exercise  be  written  out  thus : 

C          F        Gi       C         d 


315. 


153 


There  appears  in  this  example  no  violation  of  the  rules  thus  far  known 
for  progression  and  connection  of  chords,  and  yet  it  is  wholly  objectionable 
from  the  stiffness,  weakness  and  lack  of  firmness  in  the  Bass. 

Excepting  where  there  is  an  organ-point,  a  good  harmonic  Bass-movement 
admits  of  sustained  tones  only  when  caused  by  the  necessary  preparation  of  a 
tone,  or  counterbalanced  by  a  decisive  movement  in  the  other  parts. 

The  above  example  also  twice  contains  the  chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth, 
which  may  afford  occasion  to  say  more  of  the  use  of  this  peculiar  and  diffi- 
cult chord. 

Of  the  use  of  the  Chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth. 

The  infrequent  use  of  the  second  inversion  of  the  triad,  the  chord  of  the 
Sixth-and-Fourth,  arises  from  the  fact,  that  its  appearance  is  tied  to  certain 
conditions. 

In  the  first  place,  we  find  it  oflenest  in  cadence  formations,  as  the  preced- 
ing examples  show. 

Then  it  appears  in  the  same  character  in  modulation  (see  p.  142.) 

It  may  enter  abruptly  too  in  both  cases,  but  is  not  to  be  regarded  as  a 
passing  chord ;  on  the  contrary,  it  must  always  fall  on  the  thesis. 

Beside  these  instances  it  appears  most  naturally  as  a  tonic,  dominant  and 
tub-dominant  triad  under  the  following  conditions : 

a.  When  the  fourth  is  prepared  : 

b.  When  the  Bass  moves  by  degrees  to  the  next  new  chord,  or  is  sustained. 
The  following  examples  show  the  application : 


316. 


ffARMClTT, 


In  example  a.  it  appears  most  naturally,  because  it  is  based  upon  the 
Tonic,  Dominant  and  Sub-dominant,  while  on  other  degrees  (b.)  it  readily 
produces  a  sense  of  modulation. 

Used  upon  the  arsis,  it  may  also  appear,  beside  according  with  the  above 
conditions,  with  a  preparation  of  the  Hass. 


317. 


As  in  all  these  examples  the  chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth  appears  either 
as  a  passing  chord  (on  the  arsis)  or  as  above  in  the  character  of  a  suspen- 
sion (on  the  thesis,)  its  effect  on  the  thesis  with  a  preparation  of  the  Bass  is 
much  weaker : 


i 


fcs: 


I 


1s 


i 


ZE 


Often  it  appears  also  as  a  suspension  itself,  whereby  the  preparation  of  the 
fourth  is  fully  vindicated. 


319. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


155 


In  the  second  case  still  more  decisively,  as  it  appears  in  a  chord  that 
«eldom  occurs  (that  of  the  third  degree.) 

That  the  chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth,  however,  where  the  parts  move 
by  degrees  in  the  smaller  divisions  of  the  measure,  can  in  passing  enter 
without  preparation  even,  as : 


320. 


will  need  no  further  explanation  after  what  is  said  in  chapter  fifteenth  con 
cerning  passing  chords,  and  after  examples  276,  279. 

Remark.  —  The  frequent  necessity  of  preparing  the  perfect  fourth  in  the  chord  of  the 
Sixth-and-Fourth  has  induced  many  theorists  to  class  it  among  dissonances. 

In  the  division  of  intervals  on  page  17  of  the  introduction  to  this  work  it  is  classed  with 
the  consonances,  and  the  reasons  for  it  are  given  on  page  20. 

The  uncertain  relation  of  the  perfect  fourth  and  the  necessity  of  its  preparation  appears 
only  as  against  the  Bass  or  lowest  part,  and  in  general  only  in  the  chord  of  the  Sixth-and- 
Fourth,  since  even  in  the  chord  of  the  Sixth-Fourth-and-Third  this  necessity  of  prepara- 
tion does  not  always  exist ;  as  regards  the  other  parts,  the  perfect  fourth  is  to  be  treated 
precisely  like  any  other  consonance. 

With  actual  dissonances  this  is  not  the  case,  for  they  retain  their  character  throughout, 
whether  lying  in  the  highest,  lowest  or  middle  parts. 

The  chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth  of  the  diminished  triad  can  seldom  be 
used  in  four  parts,  showing  itself  to  be  too  imperfect. 


321. 


It  will  occur,  however,  in  three-part  harmony,  where  it  often  supplies  the 
place  of  the  chord  'of  the  Second  (see  later :  Three-part  movement.) 

Beside  the  condition  of  a  good  harmonic  progression,  that  the  Bass  part 
shall  form  a  good  and  intelligible  foundation  for  it,  the  second  requisite  ia 

THAT  THE  PROGRESSION  ALSO  BE  MELODIOUS. 

Certain  skips  have  always  been  properly  classed  as  unmelodious  pro- 
gressions. 


156  MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 

A  succession  of  two  fourths  or  fifths  in  the  same  direction  e.  g. : 


322.31: 


m 


i 


These  skips  are  better  thus : 


Even  skips  of  a  sixth  are  more  practicable  as  thirds  in  contrary  motion,  if 
the  position  and  compass  of  the  parts  admit  of  them: 


better: 


324.B 


better: 


Skips  by  augmented  intervals  are  to  be  avoided  as  unmelodious,  diminished, 
however,  are  serviceable : 


letter: 


not: 


better: 


325. 


Deviations  from  this  rule  often  occur ;  they  find  their  explanation  in  the 
formation  of  the  melody  or  the  peculiar  character  of  the  composition  gener- 
ally. The  observance  of  the  rule  in  theoretical  study  will  always  be  very 
advantageous. 

A  skip  of  a  major  seventh  is  wholly  to  be  avoided ;  but  that  of  a  minor 
seventh  is  practicable  only  in  an  inversion  of  the  same  chord. 


not: 


not: 


The  last  in  some  such  harmonic  progression  as  the  following : 
not  good:  not:  not: 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


157 


These  few  remarks  contain  the  chief  features  of  a  good  melodic  progres- 
sion of  parts,  and  for  the  next,  simply  harmonic,  exercises  particularly,  will 
prove  sufficient.  It  should  be  further  observed  that  these  rules  apply  not 
only  to  the  movement  of  the  Bass,  but  in  general  to  all  the  parts. 

The  exercises  given  under  314  may  with  an  improved  Bass-progression 
be  written  somewhat  thus : 


328. 


328  b. 


C          Q          O        —       F        G        G       C 


Gt         C  G  G         a        d 


fc 


-&- 


ir 

1fc-      I 

ig 

i 

G         — 


G          d^       G        a       d>j 


The  next  example  leads  us  to  explain  an  important  and  difficult  part  of 
harmonic  connection  and  part-movement 


Exercise. 

F  b°  C 


G^        C 


329. 


-&- 


I 


The  following  incorrect  solution  may  serve  to  illustrate: 

C  F  b°  C          a  dt    GT        C 

330. 


6          7 


158 


MANUAL     IF   HARMONY. 


The  errors  here  consist,  first,  in  the  doubling  of  the  third  in  the  Bass  of 
the  second  chord,  which  gives  to  this  and  the  following  harmony  an  awkward 
position ;  secondly,  in  the  concealed  fifth  indicated  between  the  fourth  and 
fifth  measures,  and  lastly  in  the  seventh  introduced  by  a  skip  in  the  last 
measure  but  one. 

As  to  this  last,  it  can  only  happen  with  the  dominant-seventh,  when  the 
root  is  already  present  (prepared)  (see  p.  70.) 


\ttr 

===j£  —  -^  —  d= 

--B^-tt 

$5=3— 

0     _•*-         ....      ,          X 
—  h-  4J-  1  <5>— 

4-0  —  W 
t-^ 

331. 


The  free  entrance  of  Seventh  and  root  is  more  endurable  and  less  harsh 
in  contrary  motion, 


332. 


but  in  direct  motion  either  wholly  objectionable,  or  only  to  be  used  in  speci- 
ally favorable  progressions,  when  perhaps  as  in  the  first  example  of  333  the 
root  g  is  already  present  in  the  preceding  chord,  although  in  a  different  part 


333. 


-&- 


I 


The  first  of  the  above-mentioned  errors  shall  be  corrected  in  the  sequel. 
The  second  is  more  important,  and  leads  us  to  speak  in  general 

OF  CONCEALED  FIFTH  AND  OCTAVE   PROGRESSION. 

We  have  already  spoken  on  p.  29  of  the  nature  of  these  progressions. 
Concealed  fifths  and  octaves  arise,  when  two  parts  progress  IN  DIRECT 
MOTION  from  a  different  interval  to  a  fifth  or  an  octave,     e.g. 


Concealed  Fifths: 


334. 


MANUAL    OF    HARMONY. 


159 


These  fifths  and  octaves  become  obvious,  if  the  skip  made  by  one  or  both 
parts  be  filled  up  with  the  intermediate  tones,  as  is  indicated  above  by  the 
black  notes. 

Since  in  all  four-part  harmony  certain  concealed  fifths  and  octaves  may 
occur,  without  which  the  choice  of  chords  as  well  as  the  movement  of  parts 
would  be  very  limited,  but  others  again  are  to  be  avoided,  it  becomes  neces- 
sary first  to  examine  more  particularly  the  mode  of  their  appearance.  The 
attempt  to  furnish  positive  rules  for  their  use,  sufficient  for  all  cases,  has 
never  yet  been  successful,  nor  could  it  easily  be ;  only  general  remarks 
therefore  are  to  be  made,  which  nevertheless  for  special  cases  will  afford  a 
standard  of  criticism. 

Concealed  fifths  and  octaves  between  two  parts  may  occur : 

1.  when  one  part  moves  by  step,  and  the  other  by  skip  ; 

2.  when  both  parts  skip. 
In  the  former  case : 

a.  by  degree  in  the  upper,  by  skip  in  the  lower  part; 

b.  by  skip  in  the  upper,  by  degree  in  the  lower  ; 

As  to  the  position  of  the  parts,  relatively  to  both  cases : 

a.  between  the  extreme  parts, 

b.  between  the  middle  parts  and 

C.     between  one  extreme  and  one  middle  part. 

Concealed  Fifths  and  Octaves  in  the  extreme  parity 
They  are  allowable,  if  the  upper  part  move  by  step. 

a.    Fifths.  6.  c.    Octaves.  d.  e. 


335. 


It  will  be  well  also,  if  one  part  at  the  same  time  move  in  contrary  motion 
or  be  sustained,  as  in  example  335  a.,  b.,  c.  Not  so  if  all  the  parts  move  in 
direct  motion  (d). 

Remark.  —  Though  the  above  rule  will  suffice  for  many  cases,  yet  it  will  not  hold  good 
universally,  as  is  seen  in  the  above  example  335  e,  which  is  not  to  be  counted  among  those 
having  a  good  part-movement,  the  progression  from  the  Sixth-chord  c  being  a  very  forced 
one.  ' 

Likewise  should  be  called  to  mind  what  has  been  said  on  pp.  35  and  36  of  the  cadence* 
forming  Bass-progression,  namely,  that  concealed  octaves  over  the  leading  tone  or  general!/ 
over  a  half-degree  are  more  tolerable  than  over  a  whole  degree. 


160 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


In  the  examples,  above  cited,  the  octave  appears  throughout  as  root  of  the 
chord ;  cases  where  it  forms  the  third  of  the  chord  are  more  doubtful,  and 
are  consequently  to  be  used  with  greater  caution. 


not: 


not: 


Even  as  the  fifth  of  the  chord  it  is  not  to  be  considered  good : 
337.  ?EzEii^=±=i 


Remark.  —  In  case  of  a  concealed  fifth  the  lower  part  will  always  be  the  root  of  the 
chord. 

Concealed  fifths  in  the  extreme  parts  are  forbidden  when  the  upper  par 
moves  by  skip. 


a. 


338. 


&  >^^         -&-  -&-       -«-  *•—  • 


In  all  cases  where  a  seventh  aids  in  the  harmonic  connection,  as  in  &.,  d.9  e., 
the  progression  of  fifths  seems  more  concealed  and  less  harsh. 

Concealed  octaves  in  the  extreme  parts  are  not  absolutely  forbidden  when 
the  upper  part  moves  by  skip. 


b.    not: 


339. 


Here  also  those  cases,  in  which  the  Bass  moves  a  half  degree,  are  seen  to 
be  the  most  endurable.  What  was  said  in  336  and  337  holds  good  concern- 
ing d.  and  e. 

Concealed  fifths  and  octaves  in  the  extreme  parts  are  forbidden,  if  both 
va*-ts  skip. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


161 


340. 


When  they  form  merely  transpositions  of  the  same  chord,  they  are  not  to 
be  regarded  as  errors,  because  they  are  really  not  then  fifths  and  octaves 
progressing  to  other  chords. 


341. 


Concealed  Fifths  and  Octaves  in  the  middle  parts. 

Although  the  movement  of  the  middle  parts  should  be  quite  as  pure  as 
that  of  the  extreme,  yet  their  position  being  greatly  hidden  by  the  latter 
allows  them  also  at  times  a  greater  freedom,  especially  with  regard  to  con- 
cealed fifths.  Concealed  octaves  should  be  avoided  here,  for  the  sake  of  a 
good  relation  between  the  parts,  and  the  case  of  concealed  fifths,  beside  the 
rules  before  mentioned,  must  principally  depend  upon  an  otherwise  good 
harmonic  connection.  A  few  cases  may  be  annexed : 


342. 


Concealed  Fifths  and  Octaves  between  the  extreme  and 

middle  parts. 

Here  alco  the  points  to  be  considered  in  such  part-progressions  are  rather 
to  be  found  in  a  good  and  natural  harmonic  connection,  than  to  be  settled  by 
merely  mechanical  rules.  A  few  examples  may  follow : 


162 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 


843. 


not  good:          not: 

djjbs-p  I 

^1=!-: 

r^ 

:M 

-^^ 

SE 

|| 

m.  —  i  —  i 

1         1    &    i 

ii 

^: 


One  particular  case  of  concealed  octave  is  specially  to  be  mentioned,  that 
over  the  seventh)  which  in  all  the  parts  is  to  be  avoided  as  erroneous. 


844. 


(Seep.  84.) 


What  was  said  of  octaves,  applies  equally  to  concealed  unisons.  Between 
Soprano,  Alto  and  Tenor  they  should  be  wholly  avoided,  between  Tenor  and 
Bass,  however,  according  to  the  position  of  the  chord  and  of  the  parts  them- 
selves to  be  regarded  as  concealed  octaves. 

The  cases,  in  which  concealed  fifths  and  octaves  may  appear,  are  so  mani- 
fold, that  it  would  be  superfluous  to  cite  them  all,  if  it  were  at  all  possible. 
We  may  rest  satisfied  with  the  foregoing  considerations,  adding  thereto  the 
followiDg  maxim,  which  indeed  is  not  written  for  those  beginners  who  are 
still  occupied  with  the  technical  or  the  purely  mechanical  harmonic  structure, 
without  regard  to  the  higher  demands  of  art : 

Avoid  indeed  concealed  fifths  and  octaves  as  far  as  possible,  but  use  them 
without  scruple  in  cases,  where,  on  the  one  hand,  by  so  doing,  a  goocf  harmonic 
connection  results,  or,  on  the  other,  considerations  of  a  higher  nature  prevail, 
as  the  melodious  movement  of  parts,  use  of  given  motives,  or  others. 

After  this  digression  we  return  to  No.  330,  in  order  to  correct  the  faults 
already  mentioned. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


163 


It  will  be  hardly  possible  in  this  case  to  correct  the  concealed  fifth  found 
there,  which  belongs  to  that  class  where  both  parts  skip,  because,  even  if  the 
Bass  progression  be  in  contrary  motion,  the  evil  appears  again  elsewhere. 
e.g.: 


345. 


All  that  remains  therefore  in  this  case  is  to  change  the  harmony  itself  and 
denote  the  fundamental  tones  differently. 
The  change  may  be  made  as  follows. 


346. 


./ 


8     r 


^ 


347 


8        7 


^ 


II 


Exercises. 


847 


—  Q  g  Q 


164 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


F  G 


Let  the  following  exercise 


S48. 


.-fcl; 


G 


D7 


be  filled  out  thus : 


849. 


The  errors  here  are  indicated  by  the  figures. 

The  movement  by  skips  of  all  the  three  upper  parts  in  direct  motion  in 
No.  1  is  not  good,  being  contrary  to  the  first  principle  of  all  harmonic  con- 
nection and  not  at  all  necessary. 

A  skipping  movement  of  one  or  two  parts  can  only  happen,  when  the  liar- 
monic  connection  (by  sustaining  a  tone  or  by  contrary  motion)  is  preserved 
in  a  third  part. 

No.  2  also  has  the  same  fault,  which  becomes  here  still  harsher,  because 
seventh  and  root  appear  in  direct  motion  without  preparation,  and  thereby 
arrive  at  an  awkward  position,  so  that  one  is  pushed  aside  by  the  other. 

It  has  already  been  mentioned  (p.  72  and  158)  that  the  free  entrance  of 
the  dominant-seventh  cannot  but  have  a  harsh  effect,  unless  the  root  bo 
already  present  and  can  be  sustained  in  the  same  voice, 

Thus  all  the  following  examples  exhibit  an  undesirable  movement  of 
parts. 


850. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


165 


A  few  of  these  and  similar  passages  could  be  excused  for  weightier  melo- 
dic causes. 

The  following  examples  may  further  serve  as  supplementary  to  what  was 
Baid  on  p.  158  of  the  allowable  free  introduction  of  root  and  seventh  in 
contrary  motion : 


351, 


The  passage  in  example  349  No.  2  contains  also  another  error,  violating 
the  rule  before  mentioned  (p.  153)  under  the  chord  of  the  Sixth -and-Fourth : 
that  the  Bass  must  not  move  by  skip  from  the  chord  of  the  Sixth-and- 
Fourth. 

The  third  error  in  example  349  consists  both  in  the  concealed  fifth,  which 
is  made  all  the  more  prominent  by  the  skip  of  the  Soprano  in  the  same 
direction,  and  generally  in  the  distended  movement  of  the  parts. 

The  concealed  fifth  in  No.  4  is  faulty  because  it  was  unnecessary,  as  the 
Tenor  could  move  equally  well  from  I  to  c.  That  in  No.  5  is  better,  being 
allowable  with  the  movement  of  the  Alto  and  Bass  in  an  opposite  direction. 

Exercise  No.  348  is  better  written  out  as  follows  : 


352. 


Exercises. 

-A     ^ 


352  b.  =51 
>= 


#         (7       —        6?     —       Da         D        G       Di 


DI      G 


166 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


filled  out  thus : 


854. 


gives  us  opportunity  to  speak  of  an  error,  called  the 

Unharmonic  Cross-relation. 

The  unharmonic  cross-relation  (relatio  non  harmonica)  belongs  to  tho 
unmelodious  progressions  and  in  general  consists  in  this,  that  a  tone  is  imrne* 
diatety  followed  IN  ANOTHER  PART  by  the  same  tone  chromatically  raised  or 
lowered,  as  here  the  g  in  the  Alto  by  the  g  sharp  in  the  Bass. 

To  avoid  this  error,  the  following  rule  is  to  be  observed : 

Immediate  chromatic  alterations  of  a  tone  should  always  take  place  in  the 
tame  part  exclusively,  in  which  the  tone  occurred  unaltered  just  before. 

Much  as  this  rule  agrees  with  every  principle  of  harmonic  connection  and 
progression,  yet  there  is  scarcely  one  to  which  more  exceptions  are  found  in 
practice. 

Hence  in  manuals  of  later  methods  the  doctrine  of  the  cross-relation  has 
been  strongly  suspected,  and  instances  cited  where  the  unharmonic  cross- 
relations  occur  in  a  perfectly  natural  way,  without  investigating  the  cause  of 
tlidir  not  being  regarded  as  erroneous. 

A  few  of  them  may  be  here  introduced : 


855. 


°-  e. 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 
*  / 


167 


In  all  these  cases  the  cross-relation  seems  to  be  formed  not  by  the  timply 
harmonic  progression,  but  either 

in  the  character  of  appoggiaturas,  as  in  a.,  b.,  g., 

or  by  the  shortening  (contraction)  of  harmonic  connections  which  are 
natural,  though  too  minute  for  metrical  organization,  as  in  c.,  d.,  e.,f.,  h. 

The  first  needs  no  demonstration,  and  it  need  only  be  added,  that  this  kind 
of  cross-relation  would  occur  mostly  in  smaller  divisions  of  the  bar,  and  the 
above  notation  in  half  notes  is  rare  and  hence  inappropriate,  since  by  them 
is  expressed  the  simple  harmonic  foundation,  and  not  those  tonic  elements 
which  serve  for  ornament. 

The  original  progression  of  parts  hi  the  above  cross-relations  resulting 
from  contraction  is  as  follows : 


358. 


Compare  these  examples  with  tluse  under  No.  S55  at  c.,  d.t  e^  h. 


168 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


All  these  qualifications,  by  which  cross-relations  have  become  natuialized, 
are  not  to  be  found  in  the  following  and  similar  cases,  and  such  progressions 
as  these  must  be  reckoned  as  erroneous  : 


357. 


Entire  freedom  therefore  in  the  use  of  cross-relations  cannot  be  justified. 

In  all  the  above  passages  taken  from  practice,  but  apart  from  their  con- 
nection, there  comes  also  the  consideration  of  the  Tempo,  and  the  consistency 
of  a  whole  resulting  from  rhythmical  divisions,  serving  to  render  these  forms 
not  unpleasant,  but  rather,  precise. 

Under  cross-relations  is  classed  also  a  progression,  known  as  the  Tritone, 
an  explanation  of  which  here  follows. 

Concerning  the  Tritone. 

The  tritone  is  contained  in  the  diatonic  major  scale,  and  includes  the  dis- 
tance from  the  fourth  to  the  seventh  degree,  in  the  C-major  scale  the  aug- 
mented fourth  f-b. 

This  interval  from  /  to  b  embraces  three  whole  degrees,  whence  also  its 
name :  


358. 


It  is  regarded  as  unmelodious  and  incapable  of  being  sung,  because  each 
of  its  tones  demands  a  special  progression,  properly  belonging  to  two  distinct 
voices : 

-  . 

one  of  which  must  be  disregarded  in  the  progression,  when  the  step  is  givea 
to  one  voice : 


in  which  case  the  melodic  series  would  have  to  be  formed  thus: 


361. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


169 


That  this,  however,  is  not  the  sole  cause  of  the  bad  effect  of  this  interval  ia 
shown  by  the  very  common  inversion  of  the  same,  which  would  likewise 
require  a  two-part  progression : 


362. 


and  which  is  equally  intelligible  and  easy  of  execution,  as  the  tritone  is  diffi- 
cult and  repulsive. 

Remark.  — It  may  be  further  observed  here,  that  the  tritone  is  based  upon  the  diminished 
triad  and  its  progression,  as  is  evident  from  the  above  example  362  (see  p.  38). 

The  reason  why  this  interval  was  formerly  especially  insisted  upon  as 
erroneous,  was  this,  that  hi  the  simple  harmonic  form  of  composition  then  in 
use  it  constituted  the  only  augmented  interval,  which  diatonically  presented 
itself.  At  the  present  day,  with  the  extended  use  of  all  the  resources  of  art, 
it  is  simply  reckoned  among  the  augmented  progressions,  which  in  a  pure 
harmonic  movement  of  parts  are  to  be  avoided  as  unmelodious,  or  at  least  to 
be  used  with  caution. 

The  points  to  be  considered  in  the  use  of  the  tritone  lie  in  its  position  and 
appearance  itself. 

It  may  occur  based 

upon  one  chord  (a)  or 

upon  two  chords  (6.)    e.  g. 


363. 


pe—  J 

-1 

/^ 
&  1 

gy 
~&  — 

^  H 

If  it  occur  upon  one  chord,  its  entrance  is  not  unexpected  and  the  ear  is 
prepared :  in  case  of  two  chords,  however,  its  forced  progression  is  very 
perceptible.  Formerly  it  was  also  forbidden  to  use  the  tritone  upon  the  two 
major  thirds,  which  succeed  each  other  by  a  whole  degree,  e.  g. 


but  not: 


334. 


can  it  be  denied,  that  this  progression  in  two  parts  has  the  same  harsh 


170 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


effect,  while  with  three  and  four  parts  it  is  much  softened  particularly  if  not 
appearing  in  the  extreme  parts. 


365, 


The  reason  why  the  interval  from  the  fourth  to  the  seventh  degree  of  tho 
minor  scale,  e.  g.  from  d  to  g  sharp,  was  not  considered  a  tritone,  is  based 
upon  the  view  formerly  taken  of  the  minor  scale  itself  and  its  harmonies. 
The  effect  of  this  interval,  being  augmented,  remains  the  same. 

We  turn  back  to  our  exercise  353  and  try  a  better  construction. 


366. 


"ZXjgzr  g-r  ^>  i  ^~H 


&0. 


i 


Exercises. 


366  b. 


JO  ^  

I  £?_ 

&  ! 

-^—4"    1   » 

•   & 

h—  «5>  

fa     

\  J  

E 


E 


E 


-T-^     I    ff    1^-1 


d# 


JB? 


c  — 


a? 


2.  Harmonic  accompaniment  to  a  given  middle  part. 

This  practice,  which  properly  belongs  to  contrapuntal  studies,  cannot  be 
commenced  soon  enough.  We  shall  introduce  it  at  first,  indicating  the 
roots. 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 


171 


ALTO.  C 


Exercise. 

c       F       G        a 


367. 


In  working  out  this  exercise,  the  sketching  of  the  Bass  again  will  be  the 
first  and  most  important  thing.  At  the  same  time,  however,  the  Soprano 
may  be  added  also  as  the  most  conspicuous  part.  e.  g. 


368. 


C  G         C        F         G        a  d'j        G         C 


The  foregoing  may  answer  for  three-part  harmony.    By  adding  the  Tenor 
it  will  appear  thus : 


369. 


1 


Exercises  with  a  given  Alto, 
i  2 


869  b.  for 


[?Cp 


F         g         C^         d          91        G        F 

3 


F        B\)      G 


B\)        G         F          g         Ci         F  F          G         F          C        d 

4 


I 


g          G          F  d        —       g        Ci     Ai       d 


d  d  Ad 


172 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


g  D  —  7          9  B\>  c  g  Di          g 

The  treatment  of  a  Tenor  part  will  be  the  same. 

Exercise. 
TENOR.    G         G         a,          g          G         Gi       G 

m 


Sketch  of  the  Bass  and  Soprano : 


371. 


In  four  parts : 


372, 


_<sz_ 


Exercises  with  a  given  Tenor. 


372 


G        G         a,        d        GI      G  G       G        C 

3 


a  E        a          d 


4 F^ — F T T— -F^—  Hi 


a,          d 


This  practice  should  be  continued,  until  the  sketching  of  the  Bass,  as  well 
•s  vhe  management  of  parts  generally,  is  perfectly  pure  and  safe. 

In  closing  this  chapter  it  may  be  further  observed,  that  for  a  good  con- 
struction of  these  four-part  movements,  a  good  position  of  the  parts  is 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


173 


especially  necessary.  The  limits  of  the  parts  themselves  must  not  be 
transgressed,  nor  the  distance  between  them  too  great ;  neither  must  they  be 
brought  too  near  together,  which,  however,  does  not  apply  to  two  parts 
meeting,  e.  g.,  on  one  tone. 

Let  the  following  rule  be  observed  in  this  connection : 

Of  the  three  upper  parts  the  distance  from  one  to  the  next  must  not  cover 
more  than  an  octave.  The  relation  between  Tenor  and  Ba$s,  however,  admits 
of  exceptions. 

Remark.  —  Transferring  these  exercises  to  the  Bass  part  would  be  useless,  so  far  as  they 
would  be  precisely  similar  to  the  figured  Basses  used  heretofore.  They  can  be  used  only 
tor  free  harmonic  treatment. 


CHAPTER  XVIII 
Extension  of  the  Harmonic  Accompaniment. 

A  given  part  in  whole  notes  with  harmonic  accompaniment  in  half  notet 
alternating  in  the  remaining  parts. 
This  can  happen 
through  two  chords, 

through  change  of  position  in  one  chord, 
through  suspensions. 
The  exercises  may  be  indicated  in  the  same  manner  as  heretofore. 

Exercise. 

'—  7    &°  G-j    Or—i      d         GT        G 


373,  :£zfc=2=: 


The  Bass  may  be  sketched  as  follows : 


374. 


=a: 


& 


i 


In  the  second  and  fourth  measures  there  appear  sevenths  of  collateral 
Seventh-chords  without  preparation.    These  are  called  passing  Sevenths* 


174 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


They  move  from  the  root,  and  always  full  on  the  arsis.    They  may  occur  in 
this  manner  in  all  the  parts. 

The  addition  of  the  middle  parts  to  the  Bass  sketched  above  gives  the  fol- 
lowing four-part  harmony : 


376. 


267 


2          6 


8       7 


The  same  exercise  with  a  richer  variety  of  harmony  may  be  written  thus : 


376. 


dD 


Written  out. 


— &- 


46          -     8 


The  next  exercise  will  show  the  use  of  suspensions. 

* 
_n *  Bfr        C         d          g  F 


378. 


879. 


PTnltfen  OM<  : 


9          8 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 


175 


3=3 


We  pass  over  the  exercises  in  the  middle  parts. 

The  use  of  the  simply  melodic  progression  in  whole  notes  for  exercise! 
(cantus  jirmus)  was  in  order  to  exhibit  the  simple  harmonic  substance  of  a 
measure,  or,  as  in  Alia  breve-time,  in  its  component  parts  (half  notes).  If 
the  exercise  is  to  be  in  half  notes,  chorals  may  be  selected  for  the  purpose. 

For  individual  practice,  one  can  easily  take  the  Bass  from  some  well-har- 
monized arrangement  of  chorals,  and  work  it  out  for  himself. 

The  mode  of  proceeding  is  shown  in  the  next  exercise. 


cGCFb°OF'c"c      a      c^  d      —     T  af$° 


This  choral,  harmonized  as  above  indicated,  could  be  written  out  thus : 


176 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


After  sufficient  practice  and  sureness  in  the  treatment  of  simple  harmony, 
one  may  pass  on  to  the  further  development  of  the  part-movement  by  means 
of  passing  notes  and  appoggiaturas. 

To  this  end  we  shall  say  more  of  melody  and  melodic  progression  in  the 
next  chapter. 


CHAPTER  XIX. 

Formation  of  Melody. 

WE  are  not  to  discuss  here  the  invention  of  melody,  but  its  formation, 
and,  what  is  very  important  for  our  harmonic  study,  the  method  of  recog- 
nizing and  using  by  the  treatment  and  formation  of  melodies  that  which  is 
essentially  harmonic  in  them. 

This  will  depend  on  the  recognition  and  comprehension  of  the  following 
principles: 


MANUAL    OF   HARMON*. 


177 


Every  melody,  however  carried  out  and  developed,  has  a  foundation  fully 
as  simple  as  those  we  have  used  as  exercises  in  our  last  examples. 

TJierefore  every  harmonic  movement  of  parts,  however  complicated,  may 
be  traced  back  to  simple  harmonic  connection. 

To  see  the  truth  of  this,  one  must  learn  to  discriminate  between  the 
essential  notes  and  what  is  extra  and  accessory. 

For  this  we  choose  the  analytic  method,  and  seek  to  develop  the  following 
melody,  which  we  will  set  down  in  the  simplest  form  with  the  fundamental 
tones  indicated  as  heretofore : 


382,     F      -      Bb     F 


Both  melody  and  harmony  are  chosen  with  a  view  to  simplicity,  and  the 
latter  may  be  introduced  in  four  parts  thus : 


383. 


-&-      -&- 


Before  proceeding  to  the  farther  development  of  this  passage,  it  will  bo 
necessary  to  premise  what  ought  to  be  mentioned  concerning  the  rhythmical 
formation  of  a  melody. 

A  melody  may  be  either  a  musical  phrase  consisting  of  a  greater  or  less 
number  of  measures  without  any  fixed  limit,  such  as  often  occurs  as  the 
theme,  motive  of  a  composition,  or  by  means  of  counter-phrases,  a  separate, 
distinct  whole. 

In  the  latter  case  it  is  called  a  period,  and  contains  usually  eight  measure*, 
having  as  counter-phrases  two  sections  of  four  measures  each.  These 
counter-phrases  or  sections  are  often  called  "  antecedent  and  consequent." 


178 


MANUAL    OF   HARMON*. 


The  details  of  this  subject  belong  to  the  science  of  form. 
See  the  author's  work :  "  The  principles  of  musical  forms." 

It  is  clear  from  its  complete  termination  that  the  above  passage  forms  a 
period,  and  it  is  first  of  all  necessary  to  find  the  division  into  sections. 

This  division  is  very  often  found  in  the  cadences  which  occur  in  the  middle 
of  the  passage,  either  as  imperfect  whole,  half,  or  plagal  cadences. 

Such  a  half  cadence  (in  general :  a  close  on  the  dominant)  we  find  in  our 
exercise  in  the  sixth  and  seventh  measures,  and  we  may  take  the  point, 
where  the  sign  f  stands,  as  the  dividing  line  of  the  two  sections  of  the 
period. 

The  first  section,  the  antecedent,  therefore  would  contain  seven,  the  conse- 
quent six  measures,  and  must  each  be  rhythmically  changed  to  four  measures. 
This  may  be  done  thus : 


884. 


I     I 


2— x 


By  adding  the  harmonic  accompaniment  above  chosen,  we  have  a  complete 
musical  period. 

Likewise  it  may  be  seen  at  a  glance  that  all  further  transformations  into 


different  kinds  of  time, 
arranged,    e.  g.  : 

e.  g.  into  J,  J,  g  or  g 

time,  can  be  very  easily 

QOR     -V     1        1 

1   "    j-2        "1  '  J         ! 

i          !         Ill       i 

885-fch|^  —  *-:*- 

*?    \~       All          ' 

T 

CE3!       ^ 

£       J 

r            1  .»* 

|      &  •               *  L<5}»      I 

y  i   *.            s  i 

/j_  -             -  ,_         ^      T 

£^4  f^-^-rf—f 

—  f-A~^  —  ^-f311 

vjj  *  —  i  tj  —  p 

.0  _  ^ 

i  I      i^i*        i 

&c. 

6  -j^—  fa  —  6  »—  ;  

=--^-1=$= 

P^-r—  ^"f— 

b—               ffi^1^—-?^—  " 

&C. 


&c. 


We  pass  now  to  the  tonic  variations  of  the  melody  and  add  thereto  pass- 
ing notes  and  appoggiaturas.     e.  g. : 


1 — r 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


179 


A  still  further  use  of  all  the  accessory  tones  would  give  the  following 
form: 


387, 


Originally. 


The  bimple  melodic  progression  underneath  will  bo  easily  recognized  as 
the  foundation.  That  the  upper  melody,  however,  is  carried  out  with  refer- 
ence to  the  original  harmony,  will  bo  at  once  evident,  if  we  add  the  other 
parts  witu  the  few  deviations  required  by  the  upper  part : 


Adagio. 


388. 


tayio.    -         ^-  ^_^.  j  -g 


1*0 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


As  to  the  consecutive  octaves  in  the  middle  parts  in  the  third  measure  of 
this  example,  it  is  to  be  observed  that  these  may  be  considered  faultless,  when 
they  do  not  occur  singly,  but  in  a  longer  series  for  the  purpose  of  reinforcing 
and  thus  bringing  out  a  harmonic  and  melodic  progression.  The  movement 
in  this  case  is  to  be  viewed  as  in  three  parts. 

Blight  as  is  the  independent  worth  of  this  example,  yet  it  is  used  here 
merely  to  show  of  what  development  the  simplest  melodic  and  harmonic 
phrase  is  capable. 

The  advantage  of  studying  and  discerning  these  melodic  and  harmonic 
relations  is  too  important  for  us  to  omit  making  another  experiment  in  the 
following  interesting  phrase. 

The  fundamental  harmonic  progression  is  quite  as  simple  as  those 
exhibited  before. 


889. 


.This passage  will  form  a  period;  the  middle  close  is  easily  found  in  the 
half  cadence  in  the  seventh  measure. 
We  pass  over  the  various  kinds  of  measure  and  select  the  following 


arrangement : 


890. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


181 


The  upper  part,  adhering  to  the  harmonic  progression,  may  be  developed 
as  follows: 


The  following  passage  from  Beethoven's  E-flat  major-Quartett  will  show 
how  the  other  parts  can  partake  of  melodic  development : 


A  comparison  with  No.  390  will  show  the  melodic  and  harmonic  changes. 
A  still  further  variation  of  the  original  melody  from  the  same  piece  fol* 
lows  here : 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 

The  other  parts  appear  with  the  following  changes : 

•. 


These  hints  in  regard  to  melodic  development  m&y  suffice  here  and  be  left 
for  individual  practice  or  special  instruction. 

Remark.  —  The  mechanical  character  of  this  whole  treatment  must  not  lead  astray ;  for 
certain  as  it  is,  that  in  composition  the  above  is  not  always  the  mode  of  procedure 
(although  Beethoven  in  the  subsequent  variations  of  th's  original  melody  must  have  in 
part  proceeded  thus),  so  our  only  object  here  was,  partly  to  place  in  the  right  light  the 
relations  of  our  previous  exercises  to  the  practical  side,  partly  to  gain  a  clear  insight  into 
complicated  compositions  themselves. 

As  concerning  the  accompanying  parts,  they  resulted  naturally  from  the 
simple  harmonizing  and  needed  little  change,  snowing  themselves,  if  subor- 
dinate, yet  not  pn  that  account  unimportant. 

It  now  remains  to  speak  of  other  modes  oi  ^.jrajarihaej*',  which  will  be 
done  in  the  next  chapter. 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 


188 


CHAPTER  XX. 
Formation  of  the  accompanying  Parts. 

THE  mode  in  which  the  accompanying  parts  partake  of  harmonic,  metrical 
and  melodic  development,  is  seen  in  the  last  examples  of  the  foregoing 
chapter. 

There  are,  however,  still  other  kinds  of  accompaniment,  known  as : 
THE  FIGURED  ACCOMPANIMENT. 

Jt  is  not  suited  to  the  character  of  vocal  parts,  and  its  use  therefor  must 
be  very  limited.  In  the  following  investigation  we  shall  treat  only  of  instru- 
mental music. 

By  figured  accompaniment  is  understood  that  kind  which  arises  from  the 
metrically  uniform  transformation  of  the  simple  chord-tones,  e.  g. : 


Simple  Harmony: 


Figured  Accomp't: 
a. 


395. 


_§?_          -fc^^    ur  i  i     .-f^j    5^**^  •»«Ltor  "*i 


&c. 


The  accompaniment  under  a.  is  harmonically  figured.  The  figures  that 
lesult  from  it  are  also  called  broken  chords.  That  under  b.  is  metrically 
figured,  and  that  under  c.  melodically  figured.  The  figures  produced  by  this 
last  are  formed  of  appoggiaturas  and  passing  notes. 

Each  accompanying  part  can  be  used  for  such  figuration,  either  alone  or 
in  conjunction  with  other  parts. 

We  take  the  beginning  of  the  382d  example  to  try  a  few  modes  of  accom- 
paniment. The  following  further  remarks  may  here  be  stated  beforehand: 

When  the  figures  are  repeated  uniformly  (e.  g.  in  broken  chords),  all  thi 


184 


MANUAL    OF    HARMON*. 


rules  for  harmonic  progression  in  a  CHANGE  OP  CHORD,  as  well  as  for 
doubling,  are  to  be  observed. 

We  cannot  therefore  write  thus : 


-m-  -J-*       *  ^*^  **' 


396. 


but  somewhat  in  this  manner : 


15=E 

\         \ 

•-i  

—  i-  

i 

tf 

J^    ^         4- 

& 

—  ^?  

In  a  change  of  harmony  the  last  note  of  a  figure  and  the  first  of  the  next 
must  not  form  a  false  progression  with  any  other  part.     e.  g. : 


not: 


better: 


898. 


The  harmonic  figuration  enables  us  to  arrange  even  one-part  movements 
with  greater  fulness.     The  examples  may  begin  with  the  following : 


899.          In  one  part: 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


185 


It  is  easily  seen  that  these  phrases  are  calculated  for  a  single  instrument 
RS  a  violin  or  clarinet. 

40O.     In  two  parts : 


%^-i--- 

-0  p  ^ 

1 

S^N* 

;  parts: 
in  the  middle  part: 


in  the  lowest  part: 


m 


f=j 


£: 


-^-' 


in  the  highest  part : 


m 


-$=2 


-&-' 

^-- 


I 


After  'nese  experiments  with  the  above  example,  the  figuring  in  four-part 
movem  nt  will  be  equally  easy  to  accomplish. 


186 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


Instead  of  this  we  rather  take  as  an  example  of  varied  figuring  the  follow* 
Ing  passage  from  the  Quartett  movement  of  Beethoven  cited  above. 


401. 


SEN!.  i^=i=£=r=  =3 


pizz. 


cres 


MANUAL    Of  ITAKMONT. 


187 


Tho  whole  of  this  rich  development  rests  upon  the  base  given  in  Nos. 
390,  391  and  392,  and  in  all  cases  where  there  is  a  change  of  harmony,  the 
progression  of  parts  is  carefully  observed.  — 

If  one  desires  to  gain  a  clear  insight  into  compositions  so  elaborated,  and 
learn  to  comprehend  their  inner  harmonic  structure,  it  will  be  very  well  to 
trace  back  pieces  of  this  kind  to  their  simple  basis ;  labor  of  this  sort  will 
be  repaid  by  enriching  his  knowledge  on  many  points,  and  qualifying  him 
for  individual  productions. 


CHAPTER  XXI. 

Exercises  in  Three-part  Movement. 

In  our  exercises  thus  far  we  have  used  with  but  few  exceptions  four-part 
harmony,  and  although  the  same  admits  of  greater  fulness  and  seems  most 
suitable  for  harmonic  connections,  yet  three-part  movements  also  are  of  great 
use,  being  particularly  adapted  for  greater  skill  and  variety  in  the  manage- 
ment of  the  parts. 

We  begin  as  formerly  with  exercises  on  a  figured  Bass. 


188 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


():.  —  i  —  i— 

rl  i~i 
.]     /s1 

[— 

41  i  ^—  - 

?>  J    J  - 

1    •        ^ 

/^        2 

-^ 

^^rH  

Three-part  harmony  is  indeed  sufficient  for  the  triad,  but  the  movement 
of  parts  will  often  result  in  the  omission  of  one  interval,  as  must  of  course 
be  the  case  with  seventh-chords,  though  the  omitted  interval  can  never  be 
the  seventh  itself.  Generally  the  fifth  can  be  left  out,  as  has  already 
occurred  in  four-part  movement,  and  in  many  cases  the  root  also ;  the  third 
as  the  interval  which  determines  the  nature  of  the  chord,  can  rarely  be 
omitted  without  producing  a  peculiar  gap. 

We  will  harmonize  as  follows,  and  annex  a  few  remarks : 


403. 


8NB. 


10  11  12 


E    |  F 

—  ffi  

—  ^)— 

—  fca£ 

_LL  

—  »  —  ?->^  ^>    ^ 

^"iTi   "      i*^~   1-           Tl-        ^- 

•««» 

1 

-fcP81 

II 

. 

4 
6           3 

E£  S 

6 
6         5 

6 
5 

[fl     ... 

+4— 



IB 

z5   ~^  —  1"  — 

•     /    A/      g 

__|  J_ 

-^           g 

—  |  

^  T 

tt  

In  the  fourth  measure  at  NB.  we  find  the  chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth 
of  the  diminished  triad  e-g-bfr*  It  stands  in  place  of  the  chord  of  the  Second 
Ifr-c-e-g,  the  root  of  which  c  is  here  omitted,  for  in  four  parts  the  passage 
mmld  stand  thus : 


MANUAL    OF    HARMONY. 


189 


404. 


i-^*— 
^  f  f- 

6 
5           9 

Compare  remarks  on  p.  155  concerning  this  chord. 

In  the  fifth  measure  a  fourth  supplies  the  chord.  Though  a  fourth,  to  be 
§ure,  can  neither  in  three-part,  nor  in  two-part  harmony,  pass  for  a  complete 
chord,  as  is  the  case  with  the  third  and  sixth,  yet  in  those  instances  where 
the  chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth  hi  four-part  harmony  can  be  used  on  the 
arsis  as  a  passing  chord,  in  three-part,  for  the  sake  of  a  better  movement  of 
parts,  the  Sixth,  or  the  third  of  the  fundamental  chord,  can  be  omitted,  so 
that  the  fourth  shall  stand  alone,  designating  here  the  root  and  fifth  of  the 
original  chord. 

Sometimes  in  two-part  movement  the  fourth  will  represent  the  chord  of 
the  second,  CFpecially  in  the  case  of  a  passing  seventh,  e.  g. : 


9 


With  four  parts  the  above  passage  in  example  403  would  be  thus,  when 
completed : 


408. 


By  the  skip  in  the  Alto  part  in  the  eighth  measure  of  example  403,  tht 
chord  of  the  Sixth-Fourth-and-Third  is  made  complete. 

In  the  tenth  measure  appears  a  chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fifth.  Really  the 
fifth  here  is  only  a  suspension  of  the  fourth,  which,  however,  by  the  progres- 
sion of  the  Bass  becomes  a  third.  With  four  parts  this  too  is  made  clearer  i 


190 


MANUAL    OF  HAEM01TY. 


407. 


The  last  measure  of  example  403  shows  in  the  Octave  F  that  the  triad 
y  appear  in  such  cases  even  without  the  third  and  fifth. 
Il  is  seen  in  the  first  and  second  measures  of  the  next  example  that  the 
movement  of  parts  often  requires  the  omission  of  the  third. 


408 


N* 

-».  —  - 

--st-tvJ- 

^rji^i  — 
a  —  I  

1 

—  i  —  <«• 

1  



The  omission  of  the  third  occurs  best  upon  the  arsis,  as  here  in  the  latter 
part  of  the  measure :  on  the  thesis,  therefore  at  the  beginning  of  the  measure, 
the  third  must  not  be  wanting. 

Further  exercises  are  to  be  left  for  special  instruction. 


Exercises  in  Three-part  Harmony  to  a  given  upper  part. 

Tho  following  exerciae  with  the  roots  indicated  is  to  be  written  out  in 
three  parts. 


191 


400.= 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


Written  out: 


410. 


33=£=- 


i 


without 
root. 

This  work  needs  no  explanation. 

The  choice  of  the  middle  and  lower  part  will  in  general  depend  on  tho 
position  of  the  chords.  Thus  in  a  low  position  the  Tenor  is  better  suited  for 
a  middle  part  than  the  Alto ;  likewise  the  Tenor  can  be  taken  for  the  lowest 
part  instead  of  the  Bass. 

For  the  following  example  the  Tenor  is  selected  as  the  middle  part, 
because  its  movement  is  more  in  company  with  the  Bass,  while  the  simple 
song  of  the  Soprano  seems  of  itself  more  isolated. 

The  former  exercise  with  a  more  extended  harmonic  development : 


Co, 


Ea 

O— 


}t    at       dD       Gi 


412.     Written  out. 


-<G_ 


6      — 


NB. 


In  the  fifth  measure  at  NB.  what  is  really  a  suspension  on  the  ninth 

.  appears  through  the  position  of  the  parts  as  a  second,  which  must  occur  very 

rarely  and  only  between  Tenor  and  Bass.     It  should  be  observed  here  that 

there  can  be  no  suspension  on  the  second  at  all,  because  the  second  of  itself 


192 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY 


is  based  upon  the  inversion  of  the  seventh,  and  conforms  to  the  progression 
of  the  latter,     e.  g.  : 


Inversion: 


413. 


— 


Exercise  in  a  middle  part. 

TENOR,  d        A       B^     C      ge°      d         —       <ffi°7      d          A 
414. 


The  Alto  is  taken  here  as  most  convenient  for  the  highest  part. 


415. 


The  same  exercise  with  the  following  designation  of  chords : 

dg      A—i  B\)G  OF   Bfre0        d     B\>F   g  C°    d  A          d 


I 


417. 


^=1= 


ids 


W&—  ^ 


= 1 


[tn  —  1  —  t  — 

h  ,^— 

ZZ 

_^2  ,5)  — 

—  w-if  

i 

4-      p 

(|      ' 

i  —  H  

_.fi_LL  

6 
6        4 

6          7 

6 

6 
| 

If  

—  Ig  oL_ 

3g  fiL 

=Mt  

MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


193 


The  last  measure  but  one  shows  that  even  the  sixth  may  be  a  suspension. 
The  former  exercises,  proposed  for  the  four-part  movement,  can  also  ba 
made  use  of  here  for  further  practice. 


CHAPTER  XXII. 
Two-part  Movement. 

THE  great  barrenness  of  the  two-part  movement  in  a  purely  harmonic 
relation  renders  it  seldom  adapted  for  other  than  contrapuntal  labors,  in 
which  alone  it  derives  any  peculiar  importance,  and  even  then  is  used  in 
movements  of  several  parts  e.  g.  in  fugues.  If  indeed,  for  a  simply  har- 
monic use,  a  metrical  and  rhythmical  variety  in  the  formation  of  the  parts 
will  render  a  two-part  movement  tolerable,  so  the  contrapuntal  develop- 
ment of  two  parts  can  alone  free  them  from  the  monotony  of  numerous 
consecutive  thirds  and  sixths,  and  give  it  essentially  that  completeness  which 
every  part-movement  should  have. 

There  must  always  be  in  this  movement  an  omission  of  one  or  more  inter- 
vals. In  triads  it  will  oftenest  be  the  fifth  or  the  root.  When  Seventh- 
chords  are  used,  the  seventh  of  course  must  not  be  wanting.  Octaves  and 
fifths  should  seldom  be  introduced,  as  the  effect  is  too  bare :  the  fourth  would 
only  be  admissible  in  a  few  cases,  where  the  chord  of  the  Sixth-and-fourth 
may  properly  stand,  or  when  it  occurs  in  place  of  the  chord  of  the  Second 
(see  p.  182.) 


419. 


sample:   OF          6°        0          —        F         C          a          G          C 

•                          -r                          1          Jfl         T                        T                          1^1  3T3  1         ^           1  ^>J               11' 

-a-f-2-f  "   :  =      :  :       ::        l  -   l__|  =    Ji 

JF 

J 

'•itte/i  out: 

1                                                                                                                        1                   II 

-^-      -*-           « 

-7BT-  --^-4-^-4  f  j  4-«  ^  «—  «- 

5 

1  —  |.  —  |  —  |  —  |.  U- 

368              3             6             63             3             1 

\ 

Iff  *K    ^  — 

-1  {  \  1  1  H- 

194 


MANUAL    OF    HARMONY. 


The  omission  of  intervals  is  plainly  seen,  on  comparing  the  fundamental 
tones  in  exercise  418.  There  will  seldom  be  a  confusion  of  harmony,  since 
each  chord  explains  itself  by  its  position,  that  is,  by  the  harmony  which  pre- 
cedes and  follows  it. 

The  same  exercise  with  different  harmony  : 


G         O 


C        Co, 


G 


420.—  E-< 


Written  out: 


421. 


—  s  1 

r~5  — 

-22  =C  

^  T 

6 

fe  (ft     tf»        f  " 

U|fl  p_| 

6 

5           — 
6                ^^2          - 

6 

=9—^1 

r-1  —  F— 

-r  S 

Mr—  ^ 

E^     t=:I 

•  a.  —  ., 

^       \  «  fh                    = 

2              - 

6 

-41  

_^  1  1  1 

-1  

4-C-  1  —  U  , 

Most  of  the  exercises  in  the  third  section  pass  into  the  domain  of  counter- 
point. The  difference  lies  in  this,  that  here  the  succession  of  chords  is 
prescribed  and  the  part-movement  remains  to  be  carried  out,  whereas  in 
contrapuntal  studies  a  knowledge  of  harmony  and  a  safe  use  of  it  is  presup- 
posed, so  that  the  series  of  harmonies  can  be  left  to  individual  choice. 

These  studies  may  therefore  be  considered  useful  as  preliminary  to  those, 
furnishing  at  the  same  time  a  view  of  the  relation  between  harmony  and 
counterpoint. 

The  exercises  in  the  following  chapter  are  to  be  regarded  in  the  sam« 
light,  though  the  restriction  to  a  fixed  series  of  chords  is  done  away  with. 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 


195 


CHAPTER  XXHI. 
Harmonic  Treatment  of  a  given  Part  in  Melodic  Form. 

BT  the  melodic  formation  of  a  part  is  not  to  be  understood  here  that 
richer  ornamentation  exhibited  in  chapter  nineteen,  but  we  merely  'meun  to 
avoid  by  means  of  metrical  variety  the  simple  choral-like  progression  of  our 
previous  exercises,  and  thereby  afford  opportunity  for  learning  to  develope 
the  parts  better  in  the  harmonic  accompaniment. 

The  following  exercise  will  make  this  clearer : 

422. 


The  series  of  chords  is  left  for  selection  when  the  exercise  is  worked  out. 
Although  the  kind  of  measure  we  have  chosen  will  of  itself  produce  a  simi- 
lar melodic  movement  in  the  parts  to  be  filled  out,  yet  special  attention  must 
be  given  to  their  good  progression  according  to  the  principles  developed  in 
former  chapters,  if  a  free,  skilful  treatment  of  them  is  to  be  acquired. 

Let  the  exercise  be  first  treated  in  three-part  harmony. 


423. 


This  treatment  needs  no  further  explanation  after  the  remarks  under 
three-part  movement. 

The  harmonic  treatment  of  this  melody  as  a  middle  part  will  show  its 
many-sidedness,  and  may  be  recommended  as  a  useful  exercise. 

To  be  able  to  retain  the  Alto  voice,  we  transpose  the  melody  for  the  sake 
of  a  better  position  into  F  major. 


196 


MANUAL    OP   HARMONY 


424. 


The  explanation  of  the  unprepared  chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth  in  the 
fourth  measure  is  found  in  the  remarks  on  passing  chords  in  chapter  fifteen. 
It  arose  incidentally  from  the  progression  by  degrees  in  the  Bass,  and  stands 
here  in  place  of  the  chord  of  the  second.  > 

The  treatment  of  the  same  cantus  jirmus  transferred  to  the  Bass : 


425. 


This  treatment  displays  one  weak  point  in  the  third  and  fourth  measures  in 
the  harmonizing  of  the  sustained  a  in  the  Bass.  So  the  bare  fourth  in  the 
sixth  measure  is  a  very  imperfect  representative  of  a  chord,  unless  it  be 
explained  as  a  passing  note. 

If  it  be  desired  to  develope  the  part-movement  still  further,  passing-notes 
and  appoggiaturas  can  be  used  alternately  in  the  parts  to  be  added,  e.  g. 

'•/•  ^T 


426. 


m 


7        6 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


197 


JOL 


3     7 


Of  the  remaining  treatments,  that  with  the  cantus  firmus  in  the  middle 
part  here  follows : 


427. 


c.f. 


-0—f- 


i&i 


6  9 


The  following  may  serve  here  as  examples  of  four-part  treatment : 


428.  Given  part: 


w. 


198 


MA&UAl    OF  BARMON7. 


429.  Harmonized  in  four  parts : 
C.f. 


NB. 


In  the  fifth  measure  at  NB.  the  skip  of  the  Tenor  to  the  seventh  should 
not  be  considered  good  for  the  reason  that  the  Soprano  simultaneously 
makes  a  long  skip  in  the  same  direction  to  the  root  g ;  this  can  only  be 
justified  by  the  position  of  the  Alto. 

In  the  same  measure  we  find  the  chord  of  the  Sixth-and-Fourth  of  the 
augmented  triad,  whose  original  fifth  is  prepared,  (p.  91  and  92.)  It  stands 
here  in  the  character  of  a  suspension  from  below  (see  Suspensions,  Chap. 
XH.,  p.  116.) 

The  same  cantusjirmus  transposed  into  D  : 


nfe  *  * 

"^, 

rn 

l  ^^      ^ 

^2 

BEi  

_H  1  ;  —  , 

c./. 


m 


430. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


199 


i 


N.B. 


7  6  5 


67 


In  the  fourth  measure  are  suspensions  in  three  parts  (see  p.  117).  In  the 
fifth  and  sixth  measures  the  position  of  the  Alto  and  Tenor  is  not  good,  as 
they  are  more  than  an  octave  apart. 

Of  the  remaining  treatments,  that  with  the  cantus  firmus  in  the  Bass  may 
here  follow : 


431. 


NB. 


The  introduction  of  the  seventh-chord  of  the  seventh  degree  in  the  fourth 
measure  seems  confused  here,  because  the  root  lies  immediately  above  the 
seventh  (see  p.  69.)  In  similar  favorable  positions  it  is  well  to  use  even  the 
chord  of  the  second  or  VII? . 

Moreover  the  progression  here  is  not  according  to  the  movement  of  the 
leading-tone,  but  in  the  same  cadence-like  form  as  with  other  seventh-chords : 
C£°  f#.__  (See  pp.  68  and  69.) 

The  treatment  of  this  cantus  firmus  with  more  movement  in  the  parts  can 
be  effected  thus : 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


432. 


-    f     &     .                     ±.       r        (: 

F        -0-        £= 

—  It 

15  p,        r.r,         .-  £ 

.     ... 

8- 

.        r_^ 

NB. 
-«?  .«  5  

: 
—=-.  —  1+ 

F  [J  L  ,  

6                                            66 

5                                    25                            74 

:j»  —  j_4-         -1          -^-l-|  -|            —  '    P    * 

T  —  t  —  r—  - 

3                             6     7 

—  ^  ff 

:=z=rc 

1      (?    f>    ..   ,       .„._       fld^  ,.^    *...      j_   j:  | 

1:  f  —  ^    0   -1  [ 

=      tt 

The  progression  of  the  seventh  upwards  in  the  last  measure  but  one  (at 
NB.)  is  caused  by  the  movement  of  the  Soprano  (see  p.  84.) 
The  treatment  of  the  cantusjirmus  in  the  Tenor  here  follows : 


433. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 

_|~  p     -H-          |~        -fa       V-*  ^-f^fSL 

201 
-*1  tf 

Eg  !  —  E  !  1  [^_u-4—  f-l  

^fi 

|pL  —  it—^-j:1"1"7  '    j    L     p  H   h 

p..   *      ^'-]^^^==:r=W  —  ^  —  ^-1 

—  |  E  !  E  —  -1-  —  r  —  r— 

6                                                                   6 
#                           43                          6                           47 

#  W  T—  |  1  1  1  ~=-r»-  1 

^*                               1    1 

The  third  measure  gives  us  opportunity  to  speak  of  consecutive  fifths  and 
octaves  in  contrary  motion. 

According  to  the  principle  heretofore  unfolded  (p.  27,  &c.)  they  are 
equally  faulty  with  those  in  direct  motion,  and  it  should  especially  be 
observed  of  consecutive  octaves,  that  they  clog  the  free  movement  of  the 
parts.  With  consecutive  fifths,  however,  the  character  of  chord-partition  is 
very  much  softened  by  contrary  motion,  which  is  especially  true  of  those 
that  move  towards  each  other;  whereas  those  moving  asunder  make  the 
separation  or  want  of  connection  more  perceptible.  (See  also  example  430 
in  the  6th  and  7th  measures  between  Tenor  and  Bass.) 

Compare  the  following  examples : 


434. 


A  glance  at  the  treatment  contained  in  this  chapter  shows  plainly  the 
melodic  formation  of  parts,  and  here  lies  the  reason  for  regarding  them  as 
contrapuntal  labors ;  for  the  essence  of  counterpoint  in  contrast  with  the 
simply  rhythmical  harmonic  movement,  consists  in  this  very  thing,  that  it 
requires  the  melodic  movement  of  parts  to  be  freer  and  more  varied,  but 
with  observance  of  the  harmonic  laws  which  constitute,  as  it  were,  the 

inmost  germ. 

Throughout  these  examples,  even  where  the  parts  move  in  quarter-notes, 
the  simply  harmonic  structure  can  be  traced,  so  that  they  may  serve  for  the 
present  to  show  the  difference  between  the  simply  harmonic  and  the  contra- 
puntal  development  of  a  given  part.  The  details  of  this  subject  can  only 
be  discussed  under  counterpoint  itself. 


202 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


CHAPTER    XXIV. 
Five-part  Movement. 

SINCE  already  in  four-part  harmony  the  doubling  of  the  intervals  of  a 
triad  is  necessary,  so  in  a  movement  in  five  or  more  parts  the  same  will  be 
requisite  to  a  still  greater  extent  and  even  in  Seventh-chords. 

As  in  pure  harmonic  movement  every  part  must  preserve  its  independence, 
so,  to  attain  this,  those  intervals  will  be  specially  adapted  for  doubling,  which 
admit  of  a  double  progression.  Now  this,  to  be  sure,  may  under  certain 
circumstances  be  the  case  with  each  interval  of  a  chord,  though  sevenths  are 
the  least  adapted  to  it ;  the  doubling  of  these  must  therefore  be  necessitated 
by  the  melodic  progression,  as  e.  g.  in  passing.  . 

Further  remarks  follow  under  the  examples  given. 


435. 


In  writing  this  out  we  may,  according  to  the  position  of  the  parts,  take 
either  two  Sopranos,  two  Altos  or  two  Tenors. 

436. 
SOPRANO. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


203 


The  same  exercise  differently  constructed : 
437. 

G^^^Z. 

80PBANO  I.     /  i~~[fr 


SOPBANO  II. 


ALTO. 


TKNOB. 


BASS. 


The  independence  of  the  parts  demands  also,  that  in  a  change  of  chord 
two  parts  shall  not  be  sustained  upon  the  same  tone  or  in  the  octave.  In 
the  above  example  in  the  first  and  second  measures  it  is  the  case  between  the 
second  Soprano  and  Tenor,  but  not  erroneously,  because  the  same  chord 
only  leaves  its  position,  but  does  not  change  to  another  chord. 

But  the  following  passage 


438. 


should  be  corrected  thus : 


439. 


-&- 


£SE; 


Remark.—  This  rule,  however,  often  admits  of  exceptions  where  there  are  more  parts,  ai 
other  relations  then  present  themselves. 

That  the  movement  of  parts  allows  also  the  leading-tone  to  be  doubled,  is 
seen  in  the  third  measure  of  example  437  between  the  second  Soprano  and 
Tenor, 


204 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


As  was  the  case  in  four-part  harmony,  still  more  in  that  of  five  or  more 
parts  will  be  seen  the  impossibility  of  avoiding  concealed  fifths,  octaves  and 
unisons.  It  may  be  again  mentioned,  however,  that  here  also  the  extreme 
parts  must  progress  in  pure  relation,  and  only  to  the  middle  parts  is  a  greater 
freedom  allowed. 

The  following  example  contains  various  progressions  of  this  sort 


TENOR. 


BASS. 


i 


lEssz=zE££i 

— i 1 —  _i — 


The  progressions  of  concealed  fifths,  octaves  and  unisons  in  this  example 
are  indicated  by  a  stroke.  The  open  fifth  in  the  eighth  measure  between 
the  second  Alto  and  Bass  need  not  be  avoided,  since  with  several  parts  the 
diminished  seventh  chord  can  with  difficulty  progress  otherwise. 

From  the  eighth  measure  the  first  and  second  Alto  might  also  move  in 
this  way. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


205 


441 


From  the  second  Alto  and  Tenor  in  the  second  and  third  measures  it  may 
be  seen  that  the  parts,  especially  the  middle  ones,  may  often  cross  each 
other. 

For  practise  in  five-part  movement  chorals  can  be  used  to  special  advan- 
tage. 

The  following  may  be  annexed  here : 


CD^    G      Z>7 


442. 


EI      a       6°       6°7    E     a 


Exercises  in  five  parts  and  more  require  a  simple  and  natural  Bass-pro- 
gression, and  the  less  artificial  and  difficult  it  is,  the  clearer  and  more  intel- 
ligible will  be  the  succession  of  harmonies,  which  is  all  the  more  important 
because  very  unintelligible  progressions  can  easily  arise  where  there  is  thig 
fulness  of  chords  and  necessity  for  the  free  movement  of  the  parts. 

The  beginning  of  this  exercise  is  here  given : 


443. 


At  the  repetition  this  series  of  harmonies  may  be  used : 


906 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


444. 


CHAPTER 


Six-,  Seven-and  Eight-part  Movement. 

THE  necessity  of  doubling  or  tripling  increases  with  the  number  of  parts 
added  ;  likewise  their  independent  movement  will  require  them  to  cross  one 
another.  The  simplest  harmonic  progressions  become  now  the  main  con- 
dition of  the  possibility  of  employing  so  many  parts,  and  it  must  be  observed, 
that  many  chords  are  totally  unadapted  to  this  mode  of  writing,  because 
their  intervals,  being  subjected  to  a  fixed  progression,  cannot  be  multiplied, 
as  for  example  the  altered  chords  and  the  diminished  seventh-chord. 

A  few  progressions  of  the  triad  may  be  given  here. 

Progression  to  the  second  degree  : 


4  parts: 


5  parts: 


6  parts: 


445. 


M   '            ' 

&•                                     rj 

S3                &                /^? 

2ZZZZKZZZ£Z1 

73             ™  -          f? 

tt                .  ,  „          J^ 

-«>-      j      -*- 

cv     —  1_ 

z*        &        *•* 

-*-  &  ~^~ 

&         &         & 

f         &         & 

-ffl_ 
-e-    -&- 

-**  ^  «H 

^S  *      0        &         & 

_&         5.         ^ 

3  *  22=^ 

7  parts:  8  parts: 

_0 tP-^ 221 


cs 

-GL- 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 
Progression  to  the  third  degree : 


207 


4-parts: 


5-parts:  6-part*:  1-parto:  3-parfc: 


Progression  to  the,  fourth  degree : 

4-parte:  5-parts:  6-parts: 


7 -parts: 


&-parto: 


Progression  to  the  fifth  degree: 

4-parts;  5-parts:  Q-part$:  7-parts:  8-parts: 


•  -  • 


<£££. &J L 

~*      ~^!L 


We  pass  over  further  combinations,  which  it  will  be  very  useful  to  try 
mth  all  the  varied  transpositions. 

As  an  example  of  the  treatment  of  part-movement,  the  choral  under  No, 
442  is  here  given  in  six  parts : 

446. 
SOPRANO  T.  &II. 


ALTO. 


TBKOR  I.  &  II. 


BASS. 


=&=&&= &t 


208 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


t— | 


647 


i    e 


n 

^    ff     *="&• 

352    ...  22^ 

r5*        r^ 

M    if 

•    i             tfr 

i             B^ 

«y         1 

DEfi 

1      I  ^3 

^                          '•& 

\ 

I          I       ' 

b 

/r?        Q^5 

\  J~~6 

r            r 

h^                   I 

i          SC- 

1             C 

fl            

I               10      \ 

1 

f            f 

f          ' 

£             1 

.... 

'          ~     I 

*=ftt=| 

^g  —  $— 

r               i^'l 

? 

—  IH 

sr*^  — 
^^ff— 

7      91 

6             3      - 

1  1  1 

sl  5  

| 

E^ 

._(  C  1 

^—v— 

-&  —  j  

f  
^1  '  -J- 

1  ^- 

6 

B 

MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


201 


— w- 


*— I 


Ii 


Since  in  chorus  movements  consisting  of  many  parts,  these  are  not  always 
employed  simultaneously,  as  in  an  accompanied  chorale,  the  harmony  is  some- 
times hi  three  and  four  parts,  and  is  worked  up  to  a  climax  by  the  addition 
of  others. 

The  following  examples  will  explain  this  kind  of  chorus-movement,  and 
especially  serve  to  show  also,  that  even  in  a  composition  consisting  of  many 
parts,  suspensions  and  passing  notes  can  well  be  introduced,  without  impair- 
ing its  clearness  and  comprehensibility. 

447. 

SOPRANO 
L&II. 


ALTO. 


TENOR 
I.  &  II. 


BASS. 


=£: 


MANUAL    OF   XARMONY. 


AwoIL 


TEKOB. 


BIBS. 


MANUAL    OF   HARMON? 


211 


In  eight-part  chorus-movements,  where  the  customary  four  parts  are 
usually  doubled,  these  are  not  always  employed  as  eight  independent  parts, 
which  might  result  in  overcrowding,  but  frequently  two  parts  of  similar 
register  in  unison  (e.  g.  two  sopranos,  two  altos,  or  two  tenors  and  two 
basses  in  unison)  so  that  the  harmony  often  appears  in  four,  five  and  six 
parts.  We  find  also  the  eight  parts  divided  into  two  distinct  choruses,  acting 
each  by  itself  and  in  detached  places. 

As  showing  the  peculiar  movement  which  many  of  these  parts  must  adopt, 
the  commencement  of  the  above  choral  is  here  given  in  eight  parts : 


449- 
SOPRANO  I.  &  H. 

ALTO  I.  &  H. 
TBNOB  I.  &  II. 
BASS  I.  &  II. 


212 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


J 


m 


Iii  movements  of  many  parts,  divided  into  distinct  choruses,  the  difficulty 
of  this  kind  of  writing  is  met  by  making,  not  always  a  tonic,  but  often  a 
metrical  distinction  between  the  parts,  where  two  or  more  choruses  co-operate; 
but  it  must  always  be  assumed  that  the  succession  of  harmonies  shall  follow 
in  the  simplest  manner  and  never  by  a  sudden  change.  This  is  also  under- 
stood to  be  the  case,  when  we  speak  of  chorus  and  movements  in  twelve  and 
sixteen  parts,  and  only  single  compositions  of  Bach  are  found,  where  eight 
and  more  parts,  including,  however,  instrumental  parts,  are  treated  obligate. 

These  hints  with  regard  to  movements  in  several  parts  may  suffice  here, 
especially  as  further  details,  after  a  thorough  knowledge  of  harmony,  may 
be  left  to  individual  study  and  taste  for  movements  of  this  kind.  As  to  their 
application  we  would  only  remark  further,  that  the  use  of  the  movement  in 
many  parts  above  exhibited,  and  its  mode  of  treatment  within  the  assigned 
compass,  will  occur  for  the  most  part  in  compositions  for  chorus,  but  not  in 
instrumental  music,  e.  g.  in  orchestral  works,  as  may  be  conjectured  from  the 
participation  of  so  many  instruments  of  various  kinds ;  and  that  for  these 
last  in  most  cases  the  four-part  movement  is  sufficient,  concerning  the  further 
treatment  of  which  reference  can  only  be  had  to  actual  systems  of  instru- 
mention,  since  the  doubling  relations,  although  often  approximating  the 
method  above  indicated,  must  yet  be  subjected  to  other  principles. 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 


213 


CHAPTER  XXVL 

Forms  of  Musical  Endings. 

DIFFERENT  forms  of  ending  have  already  been  mentioned  on  pp.  32  and 
83,  likewise  further  remarks  have  followed  in  reference  to  the  authentic 
close  pp.  40  and  53,  but  throughout  the  whole  treatise  there  has  been  no 
opportunity  afforded  of  recurring  to  them,  so  that  what  remains  to  be  said 
of  these  and  other  forms  of  ending  shall  here  follow. 

We  divide  the  forms  of  ending  first  into 

the  authentic  cadence  and 

the  plagal  cadence. 

The  authentic  cadence  has  the  formula  V— I,  the  plagal  cadence  IV-I  (or 
in  minor :  V-i,  iv-i),  as  has  been  before  observed. 

Both  forms  are  used  not  only  at  the  close  of  entire  pieces,  but  also  at  the 
close  of  the  chief  divisions,  of  periods  and  their  sections.  The  remainder 
of  this  subject  belongs  to  the  doctrine  of  form  (see  Book  quoted  on  p.  142.) 

If  the  plagal  cadence  end  a  piece,  it  seldom  stands  alone,  but  follows  the 
authentic  cadence  ;  so  in  a  piece  in  minor  it  often  leads  to  major,  e.  g. : 


auth. 
Cadence. 


Plagal 
Cadence. 


450. 


It  is  then  often  introduced,  as  in  the  above  example,  by  a  modulation. 

Endings  (cadences)  are  also  divided  into  whole  and  half. 

By  the  former  we  understand  the  same  as  by  an  authentic  cadence.  But 
these  we  subdivide  ml®  perfect  and  imperfect. 

Perfect  whole  cadences  are  those  in  which  the  Bass  contains  the  root  of 
the  dominant  and  tonic,  and  the  Soprano  likewise  the  root  of  the  tonic, 
e.g.: 


214 


MANUAL    OF  HARMONY. 


not; 


451. 


When  this  is  not  the  case,  they  are  called  imperfect,    e.  g. : 


Tr~  "  cX  T" 

T — (g      T 

ff=g^ 


452. 


&C. 


tz  :  

.^ 

^2 

..-  

£j 

£t 

/^" 

If  the  Bass  move  from  the  dominant  to  another  degree,  they  are-  called 
false  cadences. 


453. 


&c. 


Bi: 


See  examples  p.  82-85. 

Half  cadences  hare  the  formula  I-V.    e.  g. 


454. 


m 


They  consist  also  in  this,  that  the  dominant  triad  ends  the  phrase. 
Beside  the  tonic  triad,  chords  of  other  degrees  also  may  precede  the 
dominant  triad  in  the  formation  of  a  half-cadence,    e.  g. : 


455. 


Under  half  cadences  we  include  also  those  endings  in  the  dominant  key, 


MANUAL    OF   HARMONY. 


215 


which  are  formed  by  a  modulation  into  the  same,  not  a  decisive  one,  how- 
ever, through  the  fundamental  position  of  the  dominant-seventh  harmony, 
but  either  through  its  inversions  or  the  seventh  chord  of  the  seventh  degree' 
e.g.: 


456. 


0:vn°7C:V     c:  n°7 


This  is  the  case,  however,  only  in  relation  to  the  key  which  has  prevailed 
immediately  before. 

For  the  further  understanding  of  these  kinds  of  cadence,  those  which  are 
found  in  the  examples  of  this  book  may  be  compared. 

In  No.  388  in  the  third  and  fourth  measures  there  is  a  half  cadence 
formed  by  n-V,  which  constitutes  the  close  of  the  first  section  of  the  entire 
period :  in  the  seventh  and  eighth  measures,  however,  a  perfect  whole  or 
authentic  cadence. 

In  example  392  a  half  cadence  is  formed  in  the  third  and  fourth  measures 
through  I-V,  and  a  perfect  whole  or  authentic  cadence  in  the  key  of  the 
dominant  at  the  end.  (Here  therefore  no  half  cadence,  because  the  domi- 
nant-seventh harmony  renders  the  modulation  decisive.) 

In  the  choral  written  out  under  No.  446  the  first  strophe  ends  with  an 
imperfect  whole  cadence,  the  second  with  a  perfect  whole,  the  third  with  a 
half  in  E  minor  (iv-V),  the  fourth  with  a  perfect  whole  in  G  major,  the 
fifth  also  with  a  perfect  whole  in  A  minor,  the  sixth  with  a  half  in  E  minor 
IV-V),  and  the  seventh  with  a  perfect  whole  cadence  in  G  major. 

In  chorals  the  application  of  the  various  cadences  is  easily  found ;  for 
larger  pieces  they  furnish  means  for  separating  and  connecting  the  smaller 
and  larger  divisions,  and  are  therefore  to  be  used  with  great  care,  since  upon 
them  the  construction  of  a  piece  as  regards  form  in  a  great  measure  depends. 


A.  B.  KIDDER  &  SON'S  MUSIC  TYPOGRAPHY. 


MT 
50 
R5352 

1873 
Miiak 


Ri enter,  Srnst  Friedrich 
Eduard 

Manual  of  harmony.  8th 
German  ed. 


306123 

Richter,Ernst  Friedrich 
Eduard 

Manual  of  harmony.  8th 
German  ed. 


PLEASE  DO  NOT  REMOVE 
SLIPS  FROM  THIS  POCKET 


UNIVERSITY  OF  TORONTO 
LIBRARY 


.'.i^'vv 
^